CN111966252A

Movatterモバイル変換

Info

Publication number: CN111966252A
Application number: CN202010711715.3A
Authority: CN
Inventors: 胡颖峰; 王红军; 薛嵘
Original assignee: Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Current assignee: Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date: 2020-05-14
Filing date: 2020-07-22
Publication date: 2020-11-20
Also published as: WO2021227770A1

Abstract

Translated fromChinese

本申请提供了一种应用窗口显示方法及电子设备，该方法包括：显示分屏界面，分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔第一窗口和第二窗口的第一控件，第一窗口运行第一应用，第二窗口运行第二应用；检测到用户对第一控件的第一操作，第一操作为向第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于第一操作，将第一控件向第二窗口一侧移动，其中，第二窗口的宽度减小，第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束第一操作；响应于结束第一操作，若第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将第一窗口全屏显示，将第二窗口悬浮显示于第一窗口之上。上述技术方案能够方便用户退出分屏状态，并且能够在不切换应用或中断当前应用任务的情况下重新快速开启，提升用户体验。

The present application provides an application window display method and electronic device. The method includes: displaying a split-screen interface, where the split-screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a first control for separating the first window and the second window, The first window runs the first application, and the second window runs the second application; the first operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the first operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the first operation, the A control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is decreased, and the width of the first window is increased; it is detected that the user ends the first operation; in response to ending the first operation, if the position of the first control meets the The first preset condition is to display the first window in full screen, and display the second window in a floating manner above the first window. The above technical solution can facilitate the user to exit the split-screen state, and can quickly reopen the application without switching applications or interrupting the current application task, thereby improving user experience.

Description

Translated fromChinese

应用窗口显示方法和电子设备Application window display method and electronic device

技术领域technical field

本申请涉及电子设备领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种应用窗口显示方法和电子设备。The present application relates to the field of electronic devices, and more particularly, to an application window display method and electronic device.

背景技术Background technique

随着电子设备技术的不断发展，电子设备例如手机、平板电脑等的屏幕尺寸越来越大，电子设备上安装的应用(application，App)也越来越多。为了满足用户的个性化需求，越来越多的电子设备支持多窗口模式(也叫多屏模式或分屏功能)，即在一个屏幕上能够同时运行并显示多个应用程序。With the continuous development of electronic device technologies, the screen sizes of electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablet computers are getting larger and larger, and more and more applications (application, App) are installed on the electronic devices. In order to meet the personalized needs of users, more and more electronic devices support a multi-window mode (also called a multi-screen mode or a split-screen function), that is, multiple applications can be simultaneously run and displayed on one screen.

当分屏显示应用并行运行一段时间后，用户可能不需要再一直长时间使用多个应用，需要将暂时不使用的应用退出分屏。目前用户可以通过以下两种方式实现退出分屏：一是向屏幕边缘拖拽分屏应用窗口之间的分隔条，将想要退出分屏状态的应用窗口推挤出屏幕之外；二是拖曳分屏应用窗口上的拖曳条，将应用窗口由分屏状态转为悬浮窗状态。When the split-screen display applications run in parallel for a period of time, the user may no longer need to use multiple applications for a long time, and needs to exit the split-screen applications that are not used temporarily. At present, users can exit the split screen in the following two ways: one is to drag the divider between the split-screen application windows to the edge of the screen to push the application window that wants to exit the split-screen state out of the screen; the other is to drag The drag bar on the split-screen application window changes the application window from the split-screen state to the floating window state.

采用第一种方式退出分屏时，被推挤出屏幕外的应用变成全屏状态，如果用户想再打开该应用，则需要重新开启分屏或者全屏显示该应用，均会中断当前应用任务。采用第二种方式退出分屏时，拖曳条与信号栏的位置共用，存在与信号栏热区冲突问题。不论哪一种退出分屏的方式，用户的体验都不好。When using the first method to exit the split screen, the application pushed out of the screen becomes full screen. If the user wants to open the application again, he needs to reopen the split screen or display the application in full screen, which will interrupt the current application task. When using the second method to exit the split screen, the position of the drag bar and the signal bar is shared, and there is a problem of conflict with the hot area of the signal bar. No matter which way to exit the split screen, the user experience is not good.

发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

本申请提供一种应用窗口显示方法和电子设备，可以方便用户退出分屏状态，并且当用户后续需要重新同时使用多个应用时，能够在不切换应用或中断当前应用任务的情况下快速开启，提升用户体验。The present application provides an application window display method and electronic device, which can facilitate the user to exit the split-screen state, and when the user subsequently needs to use multiple applications at the same time, it can be quickly opened without switching applications or interrupting the current application task, Improve user experience.

第一方面，提供了应用窗口显示方法，应用于电子设备，包括：显示分屏界面，所述分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔所述第一窗口和所述第二窗口的第一控件，所述第一窗口运行第一应用，所述第二窗口运行第二应用；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第一操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第一操作；响应于结束所述第一操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口以悬浮窗或悬浮图标状态悬浮显示于所述第一窗口之上；其中，所述第一预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In a first aspect, a method for displaying an application window is provided, applied to an electronic device, comprising: displaying a split-screen interface, the split-screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a method for separating the first window and the second window The first control of the window, the first window runs the first application, and the second window runs the second application; the first operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the first operation is to The sliding operation at the position of the second window; in response to the first operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is reduced, and the width of the first window is reduced. The width increases; it is detected that the user ends the first operation; in response to ending the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, the first window is displayed in full screen, and the The second window is suspended and displayed on the first window in the state of a floating window or a floating icon; wherein, the first preset condition includes any one of the following: the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device The distance is less than or equal to a first threshold; or, the width of the second window is less than or equal to a third threshold; or, the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

本申请实施例中，如果用户想要将第二窗口退出分屏状态，用户可以对第一控件进行滑动操作以使第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，这样电子设备将第一窗口由分屏状态切换为全屏状态，将第二窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。悬浮状态的第二窗口不影响用户使用第一窗口运行的应用，并且当用户想要同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，用户可以随时对悬浮状态的第二窗口快速操作，节省用户时间，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, if the user wants to exit the second window from the split-screen state, the user can perform a sliding operation on the first control so that the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, so that the electronic device stores the first window from The split-screen state is switched to the full-screen state, and the second window is switched from the split-screen state to the floating state. The second window in the floating state does not affect the application running by the user using the first window, and when the user wants to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can quickly operate the second window in the floating state at any time, saving user time, Improve user experience.

具体地，电子设备可以将第二窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮窗状态，第二窗口运行的应用以悬浮窗的形式向用户展示应用界面和与用户交互。悬浮窗状态的第二窗口不影响用户使用第一窗口运行的应用，同时用户还可以通过悬浮窗使用第二应用。当用户想要以分屏方式同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，用户可以随时对悬浮窗进行操作。Specifically, the electronic device can switch the second window from a split-screen state to a floating window state, and the application running in the second window displays the application interface to the user and interacts with the user in the form of a floating window. The second window in the floating window state does not affect the application run by the user using the first window, and the user can also use the second application through the floating window. When the user wants to use the first application and the second application simultaneously in a split-screen manner, the user can operate the floating window at any time.

具体地，电子设备可以将第二窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮图标状态，第二窗口运行的应用界面隐藏。悬浮图标状态的第二窗口不影响用户使用第一窗口运行的应用，并且当用户想要同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，用户可以随时对悬浮图标进行操作，而不需要重新进行分屏操作，提升用户体验。Specifically, the electronic device can switch the second window from a split-screen state to a floating icon state, and the application interface running on the second window is hidden. The second window in the state of the floating icon does not affect the application run by the user using the first window, and when the user wants to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can operate the floating icon at any time without re-splitting the screen operation to improve user experience.

第一应用和第二应用可以相同，也可以不同。The first application and the second application may be the same or different.

一个实施例中，当第一应用和第二应用相同时，其中一个应用可以为另一个应用的分身应用，这样第一窗口运行的应用与第二窗口运行的应用可以使用不同的用户账号登录。In one embodiment, when the first application and the second application are the same, one of the applications may be a sub-application of the other application, so that the application running in the first window and the application running in the second window can use different user accounts to log in.

一个实施例中，当第一应用和第二应用相同时，第一窗口和第二窗口可以运行同一个应用的不同任务，这样第一窗口和第二窗口为同一应用的两个任务窗口。In one embodiment, when the first application and the second application are the same, the first window and the second window can run different tasks of the same application, so that the first window and the second window are two task windows of the same application.

示例性的，第一控件可以是如图6至图11中的分隔条303，第一窗口可以是图6至图11中的第一窗口301，第二窗口可以是图6至图11中的第二窗口302。Exemplarily, the first control may be thedivider bar 303 as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11 , the first window may be thefirst window 301 as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11 , and the second window may be the Thesecond window 302 .

可选地，在检测第一操作之前，该电子设备激活所述第一控件。例如电子设备检测到用户对所述第一控件的长按操作，激活所述第一控件。当第一控件处于激活状态时，第一控件可以在用户的触摸操作下移动。Optionally, before detecting the first operation, the electronic device activates the first control. For example, the electronic device detects a user's long-press operation on the first control, and activates the first control. When the first control is in an activated state, the first control can be moved under a user's touch operation.

可选地，电子设备激活第一控件的过程和响应第一操作的过程是连续的。例如用户长按第一控件一定时间后执行向第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作，相应地，电子设备检测到用户对第一控件的长按操作后激活所述第一控件，并检测到用户对第一控件的第一操作后移动第一控件。在该过程中，用户的触摸操作不中断。Optionally, the process of the electronic device activating the first control and the process of responding to the first operation are continuous. For example, after the user presses the first control for a certain period of time, the sliding operation to the position of the second window is performed. Correspondingly, the electronic device activates the first control after detecting the user's long-pressing operation on the first control, and detects that the user has The first control is moved after the first operation of the first control. During this process, the user's touch operation is not interrupted.

可选地，在显示所述分屏界面时，所述第一控件即处于激活状态。Optionally, when the split screen interface is displayed, the first control is in an activated state.

一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值。In one example, the first preset condition includes: a distance between the first control and a screen edge of the electronic device is less than or equal to a first threshold.

可选地，该第一阈值大于或等于0，且，该第一阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width.

可选地，该第一阈值大于或等于0，且，该第一阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width.

可选地，该第一阈值大于或等于0，且，该第一阈值小于或等于1/16个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/16 of the screen width.

一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值。In an example, the first preset condition includes: the width of the second window is less than or equal to a third threshold.

本申请实施例中，第三阈值与第一阈值可以相同，也可以不同。第三阈值的取值范围与第一阈值的取值范围可以相同，也可以不同。In this embodiment of the present application, the third threshold and the first threshold may be the same or different. The value range of the third threshold and the value range of the first threshold may be the same or different.

一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In one example, the first preset condition includes: the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

可选地，电子设备可以通过像素信息确定第一控件是否位于第一预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。Optionally, the electronic device may determine whether the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device through pixel information.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭；其中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于所述第一阈值且大于所述第二阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于所述第三阈值且大于所述第四阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第一预设位置与所述第二预设位置之间，其中所述第二预设位置位于所述第一预设位置与所述屏幕边缘之间。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting a second operation of the user; displaying the split-screen interface in response to the second operation; detecting that the user's operation of the first control A third operation, the third operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the The width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; in response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the second preset condition, display the first window in full screen, and close the second window; wherein, the second preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold , the first preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to the first threshold and greater than the second threshold; or, the second preset condition includes The width of the second window is less than or equal to a fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold; or, the first Two preset conditions include that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device, and the first preset condition includes that the first control is located at the first preset position and the second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen.

本申请实施例中，如果用户后续不需要同时使用第一应用和第二应用，则用户可以对第一控件执行操作使第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，这样电子设备可以将第二窗口关闭，即使第二窗口所运行的应用保持后台运行或者终止应用进程。本申请实施例通过调整第一控件的位置，使之满足不同的预设条件，可以方便地对将第二窗口切换为悬浮状态或关闭该第二窗口，方便用户快速操作，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, if the user does not need to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can perform an operation on the first control so that the position of the first control satisfies the second preset condition, so that the electronic device can The window is closed, even if the application running in the second window remains running in the background or the application process is terminated. In the embodiment of the present application, by adjusting the position of the first control to satisfy different preset conditions, the second window can be conveniently switched to a floating state or the second window can be closed, which facilitates the user to operate quickly and improves the user experience.

可选地，若第二窗口以悬浮窗状态显示于所述第一窗口之上，第二操作为对悬浮窗的操作。示例性的，第二操作为对图10中的(a)所示的分屏显示控件323的点击操作。示例性的，第二操作为对图10中的(a)所示的关闭控件321的点击操作。Optionally, if the second window is displayed on the first window in a floating window state, the second operation is an operation on the floating window. Exemplarily, the second operation is a click operation on the split-screen display control 323 shown in (a) of FIG. 10 . Exemplarily, the second operation is a click operation on theclose control 321 shown in (a) of FIG. 10 .

可选地，若第二窗口以悬浮图标状态显示于所述第一窗口之上，第二操作为对悬浮图标的操作。例如第二操作为对悬浮图标的点击操作或滑动操作。Optionally, if the second window is displayed on the first window in a state of a floating icon, the second operation is an operation on the floating icon. For example, the second operation is a click operation or a sliding operation on the floating icon.

可选地，在检测第三操作之前，该电子设备激活所述第一控件。例如电子设备检测到用户对所述第一控件的长按操作，激活所述第一控件。当第一控件处于激活状态时，第一控件可以在用户的触摸操作下移动。Optionally, before detecting the third operation, the electronic device activates the first control. For example, the electronic device detects a user's long-press operation on the first control, and activates the first control. When the first control is in an activated state, the first control can be moved under a user's touch operation.

可选地，电子设备激活第一控件的过程和响应第三操作的过程是连续的。Optionally, the process of activating the first control by the electronic device and the process of responding to the third operation are continuous.

一个示例中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于所述第一阈值且大于所述第二阈值。In an example, the second preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold, and the first preset condition includes the first control and the The distance of the screen edge of the electronic device is less than or equal to the first threshold and greater than the second threshold.

可选地，该第一阈值大于0，且，该第一阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width.

可选地，第一阈值大于0，且，该第一阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width.

可选地，第二阈值大于或等于0，且，该第二阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the second threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the second threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width.

可选地，第二阈值大于或等于0，且，该第二阈值小于或等于1/16个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the second threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the second threshold is less than or equal to 1/16 of the screen width.

一个示例中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于所述第三阈值且大于所述第四阈值。In one example, the second preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to a fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold.

本申请实施例中，该第四阈值与第二阈值可以相同，也可以不同。第四阈值的取值范围与第二阈值的取值范围可以相同，也可以不同。In this embodiment of the present application, the fourth threshold and the second threshold may be the same or different. The value range of the fourth threshold and the value range of the second threshold may be the same or different.

一个示例中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间，其中所述第二预设位置位于所述第一预设位置与所述屏幕边缘之间。In one example, the second preset condition includes that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device, and the first preset condition includes that the first control is located at the edge of the screen of the electronic device. between a first preset position and a second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen.

可选地，电子设备可以通过像素信息确定第一控件是否位于第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。Optionally, the electronic device may determine whether the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device through pixel information.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口处于悬浮窗状态时，所述第二窗口包括：应用界面显示区和工具栏，其中所述应用界面显示区用于显示所述第二应用的用户界面，所述工具栏包括以下控件的至少一种：窗口关闭控件、窗口最小化控件、分屏显示控件、全屏显示控件。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is in a floating window state, the second window includes: an application interface display area and a toolbar, wherein the application interface display area is used for A user interface of the second application is displayed, and the toolbar includes at least one of the following controls: a window closing control, a window minimizing control, a split-screen display control, and a full-screen display control.

示例性，当电子设备检测到用户点击窗口关闭控件时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口关闭。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the window closing control, the electronic device may close the second window in response to the operation.

示例性的，当电子设备检测到用户点击分屏显示控件时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口由悬浮窗状态切换回分屏状态。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the split-screen display control, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch the second window from the floating window state to the split-screen state.

示例性的，当电子设备检测到用户点击全屏显示控件时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口由悬浮窗状态切换到全屏状态。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the full-screen display control, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch the second window from the floating window state to the full-screen state.

示例性的，当电子设备检测到用户点击窗口最小化控件时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口的应用界面显示区隐藏。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks the window minimization control, in response to the operation, the electronic device may hide the application interface display area of the second window.

示例性的，当电子设备检测到用户点击窗口最小化控件时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将处于悬浮窗状态的第二窗口切换为悬浮图标状态。Exemplarily, when the electronic device detects that the user clicks on the window minimization control, in response to the operation, the electronic device may switch the second window in the floating window state to the floating icon state.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测到用户对所述窗口最小化控件的操作，响应于所述操作，隐藏所述应用界面显示区。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting an operation of the window minimization control by the user, and hiding the application interface display area in response to the operation.

第二窗口仅以工具栏标识应用窗口位置，可以占用更小的显示空间。The second window only uses the toolbar to identify the position of the application window, which can occupy a smaller display space.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口处于悬浮图标状态时，还包括：检测到用户对所述悬浮图标的操作，响应于所述操作，将所述第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为悬浮窗状态。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is in a floating icon state, the method further includes: detecting an operation of the floating icon by the user, and in response to the operation, setting the first The second window is switched from the floating icon state to the floating window state.

本申请实施例中，用户可以对悬浮图标进行操作，使第二窗口切换为悬浮窗状态，方便用户通过悬浮窗进行交互，同时不影响在第一窗口中使用第一应用。In this embodiment of the present application, the user can operate the floating icon to switch the second window to the floating window state, which is convenient for the user to interact through the floating window without affecting the use of the first application in the first window.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口处于悬浮图标状态时，还包括：检测到用户对所述悬浮图标的操作，响应于所述操作，将所述第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为分屏状态。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is in a floating icon state, the method further includes: detecting an operation of the floating icon by the user, and in response to the operation, setting the first The second window is switched from the floating icon state to the split screen state.

本申请实施例中，用户可以对悬浮图标进行操作，使第二窗口切换为分屏状态，用户可以同时使用两个窗口中的应用，方便用户操作。In the embodiment of the present application, the user can operate the floating icon to switch the second window to a split-screen state, and the user can use the applications in the two windows at the same time, which is convenient for the user to operate.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测所述第一控件的位置；当所述第一控件的位置满足所述第一预设条件时，在所述分屏界面上显示所述第二窗口处于悬浮状态的缩略图。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting the position of the first control; when the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, in the split screen interface A thumbnail image of the second window in a floating state is displayed on the display.

电子设备可以通过缩略图方式提示用户若此时停止触摸操作，电子设备将第二窗口切换为悬浮状态。The electronic device may prompt the user through a thumbnail image that if the touch operation is stopped at this time, the electronic device switches the second window to a floating state.

结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置；其中所述第三预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值，所述第五阈值大于所述第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值，所述第六阈值大于所述第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于所述第一控件的初始位置与第三预设位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。With reference to the first aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting a fourth operation of the user; displaying the split-screen interface in response to the fourth operation; detecting that the user's operation of the first control a fifth operation, the fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the The width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; in response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the third preset condition, the first control is kept at the position when the user finishes the fifth operation; wherein the third preset condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is greater than the first threshold; or, the width of the second window is greater than a sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, the first control It is located between the initial position of the first control and a third preset position, and the third preset position is located between the initial position of the first control and the first preset position.

本申请实施例中，在第一控件满足第三预设条件时，用户可以通过调整第一控件的位置，来调节第一窗口和第二窗口的分屏比例。In this embodiment of the present application, when the first control satisfies the third preset condition, the user can adjust the split screen ratio of the first window and the second window by adjusting the position of the first control.

本申请实施例中，第四操作可以与上述第二操作相同。第五操作可以与上述第三操作相同。In this embodiment of the present application, the fourth operation may be the same as the foregoing second operation. The fifth operation may be the same as the third operation described above.

一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值。In one example, the third preset condition includes: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold.

可选地，该第五阈值大于1/4个屏幕宽度，且，小于1/2个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the fifth threshold is greater than 1/4 screen width and less than 1/2 screen width.

本申请实施例中，第五阈值大于或等于上述第一阈值。In this embodiment of the present application, the fifth threshold is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold.

一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：所述第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值。In one example, the third preset condition includes: the width of the second window is greater than a sixth threshold.

本申请实施例中，该第六阈值与第五阈值可以相同，也可以不同。第六阈值的取值范围与第五阈值的取值范围可以相同，也可以不同。In this embodiment of the present application, the sixth threshold and the fifth threshold may be the same or different. The value range of the sixth threshold and the value range of the fifth threshold may be the same or different.

本申请实施例中，第六阈值大于或等于上述第三阈值。In this embodiment of the present application, the sixth threshold is greater than or equal to the third threshold.

一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：所述第一控件位于第三预设位置与所述第一控件的初始位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。In one example, the third preset condition includes: the first control is located between a third preset position and an initial position of the first control, and the third preset position is located between the first control between the initial position and the first preset position.

第二方面，提供了一种应用窗口显示方法，应用于电子设备，包括：显示分屏界面，所述分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔所述第一窗口和所述第二窗口的第一控件，所述第一窗口运行第一应用，所述第二窗口运行第二应用；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第一操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第一操作；响应于结束所述第一操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将所述第二窗口以预设宽度锁定于所述电子设备的屏幕边缘，其中，所述第二窗口处于非激活态，所述第二窗口对应的所述第二应用在后台运行；其中，所述第一预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In a second aspect, a method for displaying an application window is provided, applied to an electronic device, comprising: displaying a split-screen interface, the split-screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a method for separating the first window and the The first control of the second window, the first window runs the first application, and the second window runs the second application; the first operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the first operation is to the sliding operation at the position of the second window; in response to the first operation, move the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases, the first control The width of the window is increased; it is detected that the user ends the first operation; in response to ending the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, the second window is set to a preset width Locked on the edge of the screen of the electronic device, wherein the second window is in an inactive state, and the second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background; wherein, the first preset condition includes any of the following: One: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a first threshold; or, the width of the second window is less than or equal to a third threshold; or, the first control is located in the between a preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

本申请实施例中，第二窗口以预设宽度锁定在屏幕边缘，可以理解为第二窗口以预设宽度停靠、固定或吸附在屏幕边缘，第二窗口处于非激活状态。第二窗口对应的第二应用在后台运行，在分屏界面上不显示第二应用的用户界面，用户不能通过第二应用的用户界面与电子设备进行交互。处于锁定状态的第二窗口类似于一个功能控件，隐藏了第二应用的用户界面，用户不能与锁定状态的第二窗口交互。在一些实施例中，用户可以对锁定状态的第二窗口执行长按、点击或拖动等操作，响应于上述操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口由非激活态切换为激活态，例如使第二窗口显示第二应用的用户界面等。In this embodiment of the present application, the second window is locked at the edge of the screen with a preset width, which can be understood as the second window is docked, fixed or adsorbed at the edge of the screen with a preset width, and the second window is in an inactive state. The second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background, the user interface of the second application is not displayed on the split screen interface, and the user cannot interact with the electronic device through the user interface of the second application. The second window in the locked state is similar to a function control, which hides the user interface of the second application, and the user cannot interact with the second window in the locked state. In some embodiments, the user may perform operations such as long pressing, clicking or dragging on the second window in the locked state, and in response to the above operations, the electronic device may switch the second window from an inactive state to an active state, for example, enabling the first window The second window displays the user interface and the like of the second application.

本申请实施例中，用户通过调整第一控件的位置，可以方便快捷地将应用窗口以预设宽度锁定于屏幕边缘，不影响用户使用其他应用，并且在用户需要再次同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，可以对锁定状态的应用窗口快速操作，节省用户时间，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, by adjusting the position of the first control, the user can conveniently and quickly lock the application window at the edge of the screen with a preset width, without affecting the user's use of other applications, and when the user needs to use the first application and the first application at the same time again During the second application, you can quickly operate the application window in the locked state, saving user time and improving user experience.

示例性的，第一控件可以是如图12中的分隔条303，第一窗口可以是图12中的第一窗口301，第二窗口可以是图12中的第二窗口302。Exemplarily, the first control may be thedivider bar 303 in FIG. 12 , the first window may be thefirst window 301 in FIG. 12 , and the second window may be thesecond window 302 in FIG. 12 .

本申请实施例中，第一窗口近似全屏显示。In this embodiment of the present application, the first window is displayed in an approximate full screen.

第二方面中关于第一应用、第二应用、第一操作、第一控件、第一阈值、第三阈值以及第一预设位置等内容与第一方面类似，具体参考第一方面所述。The content of the first application, the second application, the first operation, the first control, the first threshold, the third threshold, and the first preset position in the second aspect is similar to that of the first aspect, and specific reference is made to the first aspect.

结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭；其中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于所述第一阈值且大于所述第二阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于所述第三阈值且大于所述第四阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第一预设位置与所述第二预设位置之间，其中所述第二预设位置位于所述第一预设位置与所述屏幕边缘之间。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting a second operation of the user; displaying the split-screen interface in response to the second operation; detecting that the user's operation on the first control is A third operation, the third operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the The width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; in response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the second preset condition, display the first window in full screen, and close the second window; wherein, the second preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold , the first preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to the first threshold and greater than the second threshold; or, the second preset condition includes The width of the second window is less than or equal to a fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold; or, the first Two preset conditions include that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device, and the first preset condition includes that the first control is located at the first preset position and the second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen.

本申请实施例通过调整第一控件的位置，使之满足不同的预设条件，可以方便地对将第二窗口切换为锁定状态或关闭该第二窗口，方便用户快速操作，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, by adjusting the position of the first control so that it meets different preset conditions, the second window can be conveniently switched to a locked state or the second window can be closed, which facilitates quick operations by users and improves user experience.

第二方面中关于第二操作、第三操作、第二阈值、第四阈值以及第二预设位置等内容与第一方面类似，具体参考第一方面所述。The content of the second operation, the third operation, the second threshold, the fourth threshold, and the second preset position in the second aspect is similar to that of the first aspect, and specific reference is made to the first aspect.

结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口锁定于所述电子设备的屏幕边缘时，还包括：检测到用户对所述第二窗口的操作，响应于所述操作，将所述第二窗口由所述预设宽度切换为初始宽度，其中所述初始宽度为所述第二窗口在所述电子设备检测所述第一操作前的宽度。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is locked on the edge of the screen of the electronic device, the method further includes: detecting an operation of the second window by the user, and responding to the An operation is performed to switch the second window from the preset width to an initial width, where the initial width is the width of the second window before the electronic device detects the first operation.

本申请实施例中通过对锁定状态的第二窗口执行操作，可以将第二窗口由预设宽度切换为初始宽度，即由非激活态切换为激活态，或者说由锁定状态切换为分屏状态。这样第二窗口可以显示第二应用的用户界面，方便用户操作。In this embodiment of the present application, by performing an operation on the second window in the locked state, the second window can be switched from the preset width to the initial width, that is, from the inactive state to the active state, or from the locked state to the split-screen state . In this way, the second window can display the user interface of the second application, which is convenient for the user to operate.

结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，还包括：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置；其中所述第三预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值，所述第五阈值大于所述第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值，所述第六阈值大于所述第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于所述第一控件的初始位置与第三预设位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。With reference to the second aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: detecting a fourth operation of the user; displaying the split-screen interface in response to the fourth operation; detecting that the user's operation of the first control a fifth operation, the fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the The width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; in response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the third preset condition, the first control is kept at the position when the user finishes the fifth operation; wherein the third preset condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is greater than the first threshold; or, the width of the second window is greater than a sixth threshold, and the sixth threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, the first control It is located between the initial position of the first control and a third preset position, and the third preset position is located between the initial position of the first control and the first preset position.

第二方面中关于第四操作、第五操作、第五阈值、第六阈值以及第三预设位置等内容与第一方面类似，具体参考第一方面所述。The content of the fourth operation, the fifth operation, the fifth threshold, the sixth threshold, and the third preset position in the second aspect is similar to that of the first aspect, and specific reference is made to the first aspect.

第三方面，提供一种电子设备，包括：包括：一个或多个处理器；存储器，所述存储器中包括指令；当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：显示分屏界面，所述分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔所述第一窗口和所述第二窗口的第一控件，所述第一窗口运行第一应用，所述第二窗口运行第二应用；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第一操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第一操作；响应于结束所述第一操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口以悬浮窗或悬浮图标状态悬浮显示于所述第一窗口之上；其中，所述第一预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In a third aspect, an electronic device is provided, comprising: one or more processors; a memory, wherein the memory includes instructions; when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic The device performs the following steps: displaying a split screen interface, the split screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a first control for separating the first window and the second window, the first window running the first window an application, the second window runs a second application; a first operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the first operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the first operation In an operation, move the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is decreased, and the width of the first window is increased; it is detected that the user ends the first operation ; In response to ending the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, the first window will be displayed in full screen, and the second window will be displayed in a floating window or a floating icon state. above the first window; wherein, the first preset condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a first threshold; or, the first The width of the two windows is less than or equal to the third threshold; or, the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭；其中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于所述第一阈值且大于所述第二阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于所述第三阈值且大于所述第四阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第一预设位置与所述第二预设位置之间，其中所述第二预设位置位于所述第一预设位置与所述屏幕边缘之间。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting the second operation of the user; the second operation, the split screen interface is displayed; the third operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the third operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation operation, moving the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; In response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control satisfies a second preset condition, display the first window in full screen, and close the second window; wherein the second preset condition Including that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. the first threshold and greater than the second threshold; or, the second preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes the width of the second window. The width is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold; or, the second preset condition includes that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device , the first preset condition includes that the first control is located between the first preset position and the second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the second preset position. between the edges of the screen.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口处于悬浮窗状态时，所述第二窗口包括：应用界面显示区和工具栏，其中所述应用界面显示区用于显示所述第二应用的用户界面，所述工具栏包括以下控件的至少一种：窗口关闭控件、窗口最小化控件、分屏显示控件、全屏显示控件。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is in a floating window state, the second window includes: an application interface display area and a toolbar, wherein the application interface display area is used for A user interface of the second application is displayed, and the toolbar includes at least one of the following controls: a window closing control, a window minimizing control, a split-screen display control, and a full-screen display control.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户对所述窗口最小化控件的操作，响应于所述操作，隐藏所述应用界面显示区。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following step: detecting a user's manipulation of the window minimization control An operation, in response to the operation, hiding the application interface display area.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，所述第二窗口处于悬浮图标状态，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户对所述悬浮图标的操作，响应于所述操作，将所述第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为悬浮窗状态，或者，将所述第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为分屏状态。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the second window is in a floating icon state, and when the instruction is executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting To the user's operation on the floating icon, in response to the operation, the second window is switched from the floating icon state to the floating window state, or the second window is switched from the floating icon state to the split screen state.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测所述第一控件的位置；当所述第一控件的位置满足所述第一预设条件时，在所述分屏界面上显示所述第二窗口处于悬浮状态的缩略图。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting the position of the first control; When the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, a thumbnail image of the second window in a floating state is displayed on the split screen interface.

结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置；其中所述第三预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值，所述第五阈值大于所述第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值，所述第六阈值大于所述第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于所述第一控件的初始位置与第三预设位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。With reference to the third aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting a fourth operation of the user; the fourth operation, the split screen interface is displayed; the fifth operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation operation, moving the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; In response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control satisfies a third preset condition, the first control is left at the position when the user ends the fifth operation; wherein the third preset The condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is greater than the first threshold; or, the width of the second window is greater than the first threshold Six thresholds, the sixth threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, the first control is located between the initial position of the first control and a third preset position, and the third preset position is located in the between the initial position of the first control and the first preset position.

第四方面，提供一种电子设备，包括：一个或多个处理器；存储器，所述存储器中包括指令；当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：显示分屏界面，所述分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔所述第一窗口和所述第二窗口的第一控件，所述第一窗口运行第一应用，所述第二窗口运行第二应用；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第一操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第一操作；响应于结束所述第一操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将所述第二窗口以预设宽度锁定于所述电子设备的屏幕边缘，其中，所述第二窗口处于非激活态，所述第二窗口对应的所述第二应用在后台运行；其中，所述第一预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于第一预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In a fourth aspect, an electronic device is provided, comprising: one or more processors; a memory, the memory including instructions; when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is made to execute The following steps: display a split screen interface, the split screen interface includes a first window, a second window and a first control for separating the first window and the second window, the first window runs a first application , the second window runs a second application; detects the user's first operation on the first control, where the first operation is a sliding operation to the location of the second window; in response to the first operation , move the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the first operation; the response After finishing the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, lock the second window to the edge of the screen of the electronic device with a preset width, wherein the second window In an inactive state, the second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background; wherein, the first preset condition includes any one of the following: the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device are The distance is less than or equal to a first threshold; or, the width of the second window is less than or equal to a third threshold; or, the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭；其中，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于所述第一阈值且大于所述第二阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，所述第一预设条件包括所述第二窗口的宽度小于或等于所述第三阈值且大于所述第四阈值；或者，所述第二预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第二预设位置与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，所述第一预设条件包括所述第一控件位于所述第一预设位置与所述第二预设位置之间，其中所述第二预设位置位于所述第一预设位置与所述屏幕边缘之间。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting the second operation of the user; the second operation, the split screen interface is displayed; the third operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the third operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation operation, moving the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; In response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control satisfies a second preset condition, display the first window in full screen, and close the second window; wherein the second preset condition Including that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to the predetermined threshold. the first threshold and greater than the second threshold; or, the second preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes the width of the second window. The width is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold; or, the second preset condition includes that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device , the first preset condition includes that the first control is located between the first preset position and the second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the second preset position. between the edges of the screen.

结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述第二窗口锁定于所述电子设备的屏幕边缘时，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户对所述第二窗口的操作，响应于所述操作，将所述第二窗口由所述预设宽度切换为初始宽度，其中所述初始宽度为所述第二窗口在所述电子设备检测所述第一操作前的宽度。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the second window is locked on the edge of the screen of the electronic device, when the instruction is executed by the one or more processors, the instruction causes the The electronic device performs the following steps: detecting a user's operation on the second window, and in response to the operation, switching the second window from the preset width to an initial width, wherein the initial width is the first width The width of the second window before the electronic device detects the first operation.

结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当所述指令被所述一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述电子设备执行以下步骤：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置；其中所述第三预设条件包括以下任一种：所述第一控件与所述电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值，所述第五阈值大于所述第一阈值；或，所述第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值，所述第六阈值大于所述第三阈值；或，所述第一控件位于所述第一控件的初始位置与第三预设位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。With reference to the fourth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, when the instructions are executed by the one or more processors, the electronic device is caused to perform the following steps: detecting a fourth operation of the user; the fourth operation, the split screen interface is displayed; the fifth operation of the user on the first control is detected, and the fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation operation, moving the first control to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases, and the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; In response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control satisfies a third preset condition, the first control is left at the position when the user ends the fifth operation; wherein the third preset The condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold, and the fifth threshold is greater than the first threshold; or, the width of the second window is greater than the first threshold Six thresholds, the sixth threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, the first control is located between the initial position of the first control and a third preset position, and the third preset position is located in the between the initial position of the first control and the first preset position.

第五方面，提供了一种装置，该装置包含在电子设备中，该装置具有实现上述第一方面和第二方面及上述第一方面和第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中电子设备行为的功能。功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a fifth aspect, an apparatus is provided, the apparatus is included in an electronic device, and the apparatus has the behavior of the electronic device in implementing the above-mentioned first aspect and the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the above-mentioned first aspect and the second aspect function. The functions can be implemented by hardware, or by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above functions.

第六方面，提供了一种电子设备，包括一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。该一个或多个存储器与一个或多个处理器耦合，一个或多个存储器用于存储计算机程序代码，计算机程序代码包括计算机指令，当一个或多个处理器执行计算机指令时，使得电子设备执行上述第一方面和第二方面及上述第一方面和第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中的应用窗口显示方法。In a sixth aspect, an electronic device is provided, including one or more processors and one or more memories. The one or more memories are coupled to the one or more processors for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions that, when executed by the one or more processors, cause the electronic device to perform The above first aspect and the second aspect and the application window display method in any possible implementation manner of the above first aspect and the second aspect.

第七方面，提供了一种计算机存储介质，包括计算机指令，当计算机指令在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述第一方面和第二方面及上述第一方面和第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中的应用窗口显示方法。In a seventh aspect, a computer storage medium is provided, comprising computer instructions, which, when the computer instructions are executed on an electronic device, cause the electronic device to perform the above-mentioned first and second aspects and any one of the above-mentioned first and second aspects An application window display method in a possible implementation.

第八方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述第一方面和第二方面及上述第一方面和第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中的应用窗口显示方法。In an eighth aspect, a computer program product is provided, when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform the above-mentioned first aspect and the second aspect and any one of the above-mentioned first aspect and the second aspect may be realized. The application window display method in the mode.

第九方面，提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括至少一个处理器，当程序指令在该至少一个处理器中执行时，使得上述第一方面和第二方面及上述第一方面和第二方面的任一种可能实现方式中的应用窗口显示方法在电子设备上的功能得以实现。In a ninth aspect, a chip system is provided, the chip system includes at least one processor, and when program instructions are executed in the at least one processor, the above-mentioned first and second aspects and the above-mentioned first and second aspects are made The functions of the method for displaying an application window in any possible implementation manner of the aspect are implemented on the electronic device.

附图说明Description of drawings

图1是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的硬件结构示意图；1 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图2是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的软件结构示意图；2 is a schematic diagram of a software structure of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图3是一种窗口管理机制的示意性框图；3 is a schematic block diagram of a window management mechanism;

图4是本申请实施例提供的一组图形用户界面示意图；4 is a schematic diagram of a group of graphical user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图5是现有的应用窗口退出分屏的用户界面示意图；Fig. 5 is the user interface schematic diagram of existing application window exiting split screen;

图6是本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；6 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图7是本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；7 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图8是本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；8 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图9是本申请实施例提供的另一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；9 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图10是本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法中应用窗口切换为悬浮窗状态时的图形用户界面示意图；10 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface when an application window is switched to a floating window state in an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图11是本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法中应用窗口切换为悬浮求状态时的图形用户界面示意图；11 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface when an application window is switched to a suspended state in an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图12本申请实施例提供的又一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；12 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图13是本申请实施例提供的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态时分隔条的功能分区示意图；13 is a schematic diagram of a functional partition of a divider bar when an application window is switched to a suspended state according to an embodiment of the present application;

图14是本申请实施例提供的应用窗口处于锁定状态时分隔条的功能分区示意图；14 is a schematic diagram of a functional partition of a divider bar when an application window is in a locked state according to an embodiment of the present application;

图15是本申请实施例提供的又一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；15 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图16是本申请实施例提供的又一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图；16 is a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of an application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图17是本申请实施例提供的一种应用窗口显示方法的示意性流程图；17 is a schematic flowchart of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图18是本申请实施例提供的另一种应用窗口显示方法的示意性流程图；FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图19是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的示意性框图。FIG. 19 is a schematic block diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.

需要说明的是，在本申请实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示或的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B；本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，在本申请实施例的描述中，“多个”是指两个或多于两个，“至少一个”、“一个或多个”是指一个、两个或两个以上。It should be noted that, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise stated, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this document is only a kind of Describing the association relationship of associated objects, it means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiments of the present application, "a plurality" refers to two or more than two, and "at least one" and "one or more" refer to one, two, or more than two.

以下，术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本实施例的描述中，除非另有说明，“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be construed as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of indicated technical features. Thus, a feature defined as "first", "second" may expressly or implicitly include one or more of that feature. In the description of this embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more.

在本说明书中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此，在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例，而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”，除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。References in this specification to "one embodiment" or "some embodiments" and the like mean that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the present application. Thus, appearances of the phrases "in one embodiment," "in some embodiments," "in other embodiments," "in other embodiments," etc. in various places in this specification are not necessarily All refer to the same embodiment, but mean "one or more but not all embodiments" unless specifically emphasized otherwise. The terms "including", "including", "having" and their variants mean "including but not limited to" unless specifically emphasized otherwise.

本申请实施例提供了一种应用窗口显示方法，可以应用于电子设备，也可以是单独的应用程序，该应用程序可实现本申请中的应用窗口显示方法。具体地，本申请提供的应用窗口显示方法可以将以分屏状态显示的应用窗口切换为以悬浮窗或悬浮图标的状态显示，或者将应用窗口锁定于屏幕边缘。这样当用户需要再次使用该应用时，用户可以在不中断当前应用任务的情况下，快速地对悬浮窗或悬浮图标或被锁定的应用窗口进行操作，提升用户体验。The embodiment of the present application provides a method for displaying an application window, which can be applied to an electronic device or a separate application program, and the application program can implement the method for displaying an application window in the present application. Specifically, the application window display method provided by the present application can switch the application window displayed in a split-screen state to be displayed in the state of a floating window or a floating icon, or lock the application window at the edge of the screen. In this way, when the user needs to use the application again, the user can quickly operate the floating window or the floating icon or the locked application window without interrupting the current application task, thereby improving the user experience.

本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法可以应用于手机(例如普通屏幕手机、曲面屏手机、折叠屏手机、全面屏手机等)、平板电脑、车载设备、可穿戴设备(如智能手表、智能手环、智能眼镜、智能首饰等)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)/虚拟现实(virtualreality，VR)设备、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、电视、显示器以及其他具有显示功能的电子设备上，本申请实施例对电子设备的具体类型不作任何限制。电子设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于搭载

或者其它操作系统的电子设备。The application window display method provided by the embodiments of the present application can be applied to mobile phones (such as ordinary screen mobile phones, curved screen mobile phones, folding screen mobile phones, full-screen mobile phones, etc.), tablet computers, vehicle equipment, and wearable devices (such as smart watches, smart phones, etc.) rings, smart glasses, smart jewelry, etc.), augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) devices, laptops, ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPC), netbooks, personal digital assistants For personal digital assistant (PDA), televisions, monitors, and other electronic devices with a display function, the embodiments of the present application do not impose any restrictions on the specific types of electronic devices. Exemplary embodiments of electronic devices include, but are not limited to, onboard

Or other electronic devices with operating systems.

示例性的，图1示出了电子设备100的结构示意图。电子设备100可以包括处理器110，外部存储器接口120，内部存储器121，通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口130，充电管理模块140，电源管理模块141，电池142，天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，传感器模块180，按键190，马达191，指示器192，摄像头193，显示屏194，以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A，陀螺仪传感器180B，气压传感器180C，磁传感器180D，加速度传感器180E，距离传感器180F，接近光传感器180G，指纹传感器180H，温度传感器180J，触摸传感器180K，环境光传感器180L，骨传导传感器180M等。Exemplarily, FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 may include aprocessor 110, anexternal memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, acharge management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, anantenna 1, anantenna 2 ,mobile communication module 150,wireless communication module 160,audio module 170,speaker 170A,receiver 170B,microphone 170C,headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM)card interface 195 and the like. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L,bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.

可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者拆分某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件，软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structures illustrated in the embodiments of the present application do not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.

处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元，例如：处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor，AP)，调制解调处理器，图形处理器(graphics processingunit，GPU)，图像信号处理器(image signal processor，ISP)，控制器，存储器，视频编解码器，数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，基带处理器，和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit，NPU)等。其中，不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件，也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。Theprocessor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, theprocessor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor ( image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU), etc. . Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.

例如，在本申请中，部分处理单元可以实现本申请实施中，当分隔条控件的位置满足第一预设条件时，将被挤压的应用窗口悬浮显示于其他分屏状态的应用窗口之上。For example, in the present application, some processing units may implement that in the implementation of the present application, when the position of the divider bar control satisfies the first preset condition, the squeezed application window is suspended and displayed above the application windows in other split-screen states. .

再如，部分处理单元可以实现本申请实施中，当分隔条控件的位置满足第二预设条件时，将被挤压的应用窗口关闭。For another example, some processing units may implement, in the implementation of the present application, when the position of the divider bar control satisfies the second preset condition, the squeezed application window is closed.

又如，部分处理单元可以实现本申请实施中，当分隔条控件的位置满足第三预设条件时，将分隔条控件控件停留在用户触摸操作离开的位置。For another example, some processing units may implement, in the implementation of the present application, when the position of the divider bar control meets the third preset condition, the divider bar control control stays at the position where the user's touch operation leaves.

又如，部分处理单元可以实现本申请实施中，当分隔条控件的位置满足第一预设条件时，在分屏界面上显示被挤压的应用窗口处于悬浮状态的缩略图。For another example, some processing units may implement that in the implementation of the present application, when the position of the divider bar control meets the first preset condition, a thumbnail image of the squeezed application window in a floating state is displayed on the split screen interface.

其中，控制器可以是电子设备100的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号，产生操作控制信号，完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 100 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.

处理器110中还可以设置存储器，用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中，处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据，可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取，减少了处理器110的等待时间，因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in theprocessor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory inprocessor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by theprocessor 110 . If theprocessor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of theprocessor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.

在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit，I2C)接口，集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuitsound，I2S)接口，脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation，PCM)接口，通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter，UART)接口，移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface，MIPI)，通用输入输出(general-purposeinput/output，GPIO)接口，用户标识模块(subscriber identity module，SIM)接口，和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus，USB)接口等。In some embodiments, theprocessor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuitsound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous receiver (universal asynchronous receiver) interface /transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and/or Universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.

I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线，包括一根串行数据线(serial data line，SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line，SCL)。在一些实施例中，处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K，充电器，闪光灯，摄像头193等。例如：处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K，使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信，实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus that includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, theprocessor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2C buses. Theprocessor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, theprocessor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that theprocessor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate with each other through the I2C bus interface, so as to realize the touch function of the electronic device 100 .

I2S接口可以用于音频通信。PCM接口也可以用于音频通信，将模拟信号抽样，量化和编码。UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线，用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194，摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serialinterface，CSI)，显示屏串行接口(display serial interface，DSI)等。在一些实施例中，处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信，实现电子设备100的显示功能。GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号，也可被配置为数据信号。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口，I2S接口，UART接口，MIPI接口等。USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口，具体可以是MiniUSB接口，Micro USB接口，USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电，也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机，通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备，例如AR设备等。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals. The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. The MIPI interface can be used to connect theprocessor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include a camera serial interface (camera serial interface, CSI), a display serial interface (display serial interface, DSI), and the like. In some embodiments, theprocessor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through a CSI interface, so as to realize the photographing function of the electronic device 100 . Theprocessor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 . The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. The GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc. The USB interface 130 is an interface conforming to the USB standard specification, and may specifically be a MiniUSB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones. The interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.

可以理解的是，本申请实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系，只是示意性说明，并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中，电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式，或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiments of the present application is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.

充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。电源管理模块141用于连接电池142。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时，还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量，电池循环次数，电池健康状态等参数。Thecharging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142 . While thecharging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, and battery health status.

电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1，天线2，移动通信模块150，无线通信模块160，调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波，并对接收的电磁波进行滤波，放大等处理，传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大，经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)(如无线保真(wirelessfidelity，Wi-Fi)网络)，蓝牙(bluetooth，BT)，全球导航卫星系统(global navigationsatellite system，GNSS)，调频(frequency modulation，FM)，近距离无线通信技术(nearfield communication，NFC)，红外技术(infrared，IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波，将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理，将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号，对其进行调频，放大，经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中，电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合，天线2和无线通信模块160耦合，使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 may be implemented by theantenna 1, theantenna 2, themobile communication module 150, thewireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.Antenna 1 andAntenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Themobile communication module 150 may provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 100 . Themobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from theantenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation. Themobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through theantenna 1 . Thewireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (eg wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) networks), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (nearfield communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. Thewireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. Thewireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via theantenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to theprocessor 110 . Thewireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from theprocessor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through theantenna 2 . In some embodiments, theantenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled with themobile communication module 150, and theantenna 2 is coupled with thewireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.

电子设备100通过GPU，显示屏194，及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器，连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算，用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU，其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.

显示屏194用于显示图像，视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display，LCD)，有机发光二极管(organic light-emittingdiode，OLED)，有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrixorganic light emitting diode，AMOLED)，柔性发光二极管(flex light-emittingdiode，FLED)，Miniled，MicroLed，Micro-oLed，量子点发光二极管(quantum dot lightemitting diodes，QLED)等。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194，N为大于1的正整数。Display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like. Display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light-emitting diode). , AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diodes (flex light-emitting diodes, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include one or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than one.

在本申请中，显示屏194可以用于显示分屏界面，还可以用于当分隔条控件的位置满足第一预设条件时，显示被挤压的应用窗口的悬浮状态缩略图，还可以当分隔条控件的位置满足第一预设条件时，显示被挤压的应用窗口的悬浮状态，例如悬浮窗或悬浮图标。In this application, the display screen 194 can be used to display a split-screen interface, and can also be used to display the floating state thumbnail of the squeezed application window when the position of the divider bar control meets the first preset condition. When the position of the divider bar control meets the first preset condition, the floating state of the squeezed application window, such as a floating window or a floating icon, is displayed.

电子设备100可以通过ISP，摄像头193，视频编解码器，GPU，显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。其中ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device，CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor，CMOS)光电晶体管。在一些实施例中，电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193，N为大于1的正整数。The electronic device 100 may implement a shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 . The camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object is projected through the lens to generate an optical image onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.

外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡，例如Micro SD卡，实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信，实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐，视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码，所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令，从而执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中，存储程序区可存储操作系统，至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能，图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据，电话本等)等。Theexternal memory interface 120 may be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 . The external memory card communicates with theprocessor 110 through theexternal memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card. Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. Theprocessor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . The internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like. The storage data area may store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 100 and the like.

电子设备100可以通过音频模块170，扬声器170A，受话器170B，麦克风170C，耳机接口170D，以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放，录音等。The electronic device 100 may implement audio functions through anaudio module 170, aspeaker 170A, areceiver 170B, amicrophone 170C, anearphone interface 170D, an application processor, and the like. Such as music playback, recording, etc.

此外，手机100还包括多个传感器。例如，图1中示出的多个传感器，其中，压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号，可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中，压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多，如电阻式压力传感器，电感式压力传感器，电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A，电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194，电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中，作用于相同触摸位置，但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作，可以对应不同的操作指令。例如：当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时，执行新建短消息的指令。In addition, the cell phone 100 also includes a plurality of sensors. For example, the plurality of sensors shown in FIG. 1 , where the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals, can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, and the like. The capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure according to the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction to create a new short message is executed.

在本申请中，压力传感器180A可以用于检测用户对分屏界面上分隔条的操作，可以用于检测用户对悬浮窗状态的应用窗口的操作，可以用于检测用户对悬浮图标状态的应用窗口的操作等。In this application, the pressure sensor 180A can be used to detect the user's operation on the partition bar on the split screen interface, can be used to detect the user's operation on the application window in the floating window state, and can be used to detect the user's application window in the floating icon state operation, etc.

陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。气压传感器180C用于测量气压。磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器，电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套或翻盖的开合。加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态，应用于横竖屏切换，计步器等应用。距离传感器180F，用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器，例如光电二极管，接近光传感器180G可以检测电子设备附近是否有物体。环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度，电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度、在拍照时自动调节白平衡等。指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。温度传感器180J用于检测温度。骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。触摸传感器180K，也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194，由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏，也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器，以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中，触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面，与显示屏194所处的位置不同。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion attitude of the electronic device 100 . The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor, and the electronic device 100 can use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip holster or the flip. The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 100 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc. Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. The electronic device 100 can measure the distance through infrared or laser. The proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes, and the proximity light sensor 180G may detect whether there is an object in the vicinity of the electronic device. The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness, and the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the sensed ambient light brightness, automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures, and the like. The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature. Thebone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. Touch sensor 180K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194 , and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 , which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.

在本申请中，触摸传感器180K可以用于检测用户分隔条控件的触摸操作等。In the present application, the touch sensor 180K may be used to detect a user's touch operation of the divider bar control and the like.

电子设备上的按键190包括开机键，音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入，产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示，也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如，作用于不同应用(例如拍照，音频播放等)的触摸操作，可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作，马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如：时间提醒，接收信息，闹钟，游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。指示器192可以是指示灯，可以用于指示充电状态，电量变化，也可以用于指示消息，未接来电，通知等。SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。The keys 190 on the electronic device include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key. The electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 . Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues. The motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations acting on different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations on different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization. The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like. TheSIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.

在本申请中，马达191可以在分隔条控件的位置满足第一预设条件时，产生振动提示。In the present application, the motor 191 may generate a vibration prompt when the position of the divider bar control meets the first preset condition.

以上介绍了电子设备100可能的硬件结构示意图。电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构，事件驱动架构，微核架构，微服务架构，或云架构。本申请实施例以分层架构的

系统为例，示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。A schematic diagram of a possible hardware structure of the electronic device 100 has been introduced above. The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiments of the present application use a layered architecture

Taking the system as an example, the software structure of the electronic device 100 is exemplarily described.

图2是本申请实施例的电子设备100的软件结构框图。分层架构将电子设备的软件分成若干个层，每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中，将Android系统分为四层，从上至下分别为应用程序(application，APP)层，应用程序框架(framework)层，系统运行库层(包括系统库和安卓运行时(Android runtime))，以及内核层。FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the software structure of the electronic device 100 according to the embodiment of the present application. The layered architecture divides the software of electronic equipment into several layers, each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate with each other through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, which are, from top to bottom, an application (application, APP) layer, an application framework (framework) layer, and a system runtime layer (including the system library and the Android runtime ( Android runtime)), and the kernel layer.

应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。如图2所示，应用程序包可以包括相机，图库，日历，通话，地图，导航，WLAN，蓝牙，音乐，视频，短信息等应用程序。应用程序主要是用户界面(user interface，UI)方面的，通常使用JAVA语言调用应用程序框架层的接口编写。The application layer can include a series of application packages. As shown in Figure 2, the application package can include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message and so on. The application program is mainly in the aspect of user interface (UI), which is usually written in JAVA language to call the interface of the application framework layer.

应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(applicationprogramming interface，API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。如图2所示，应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器，内容提供器，视图系统，电话管理器，资源管理器，通知管理器等。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for the applications of the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions. As shown in Figure 2, the application framework layer may include window managers, content providers, view systems, telephony managers, resource managers, notification managers, and the like.

窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小，判断是否有状态栏，锁定屏幕，截取屏幕等。示例性的，窗口管理器可以获取电子设备100上待显示窗口的大小，判断该待显示窗口的内容等。应理解，电子设备100的待显示窗口可以包括电子设备100的界面上正在显示的窗口，还可以包括电子设备100后台运行的一个或多个应用程序的窗口。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take screenshots, etc. Exemplarily, the window manager may acquire the size of the window to be displayed on the electronic device 100, and determine the content of the window to be displayed, and the like. It should be understood that the to-be-displayed window of the electronic device 100 may include a window being displayed on the interface of the electronic device 100 , and may also include a window of one or more application programs running in the background of the electronic device 100 .

图3示出了窗口管理机制的示意性框图。如图3中的(a)所示，窗口管理器是一个服务(service)，它是全局的、系统中唯一的、独立于安卓(Android)应用程序的单独的C++服务，窗口管理器被所有Android应用程序公用。Android的窗口管理系统是基于客户端/服务端(client/service，C/S)模式的，整个窗口系统分为服务端(service)和客户端(client)两大部分。客户端即应用程序，负责请求创建窗口和使用窗口；服务端即窗口管理服务(window manager service或WindowManagerService，WMS)，负责完成窗口的维护、窗口显示等。客户端并不是直接和窗口管理服务交互，而是直接和本地对象窗口管理(windowmanager或WindowManager)交互，然后由窗口管理(WindowManager)完成和窗口管理服务(WindowManagerService)的交互。对于应用来说这个交互是透明的，应用不能感知到窗口管理服务的存在。Figure 3 shows a schematic block diagram of the window management mechanism. As shown in (a) of Figure 3, the window manager is a service (service), which is a global, system-only, separate C++ service independent of Android applications, and the window manager is used by all Common for Android applications. Android's window management system is based on the client/service (client/service, C/S) mode, and the entire window system is divided into two parts: a server (service) and a client (client). The client is the application program, which is responsible for requesting the creation and use of the window; the server is the window manager service (window manager service or WindowManagerService, WMS), which is responsible for completing the maintenance of the window and the display of the window. The client does not directly interact with the window management service, but directly interacts with the local object window management (windowmanager or WindowManager), and then the window management (WindowManager) completes the interaction with the window management service (WindowManagerService). This interaction is transparent to the application, and the application cannot perceive the existence of the window management service.

在安卓的应用框架中，窗口主要分为两种，一种是应用窗口，一种是公共界面的窗口。在应用窗口中，一个活动(activity或Activity)有一个主窗口和多个子窗口，例如弹出的对话框、菜单(menu)即一个子窗口。在同一个Activity中，主窗口和子窗口之间通过在Activity关联起来。子窗口不能单独存在，需要依附在特定的父窗口中。公共界面的窗口也称系统窗口，包括最近运行对话框、关机对话框、状态栏下拉栏、锁屏界面等，系统窗口不从属于任何应用，和Activity没有关系。In the Android application framework, windows are mainly divided into two types, one is the application window and the other is the window of the public interface. In the application window, an activity (activity or Activity) has a main window and multiple sub-windows, such as a pop-up dialog box and a menu (menu), that is, a sub-window. In the same Activity, the main window and the sub-window are associated through the Activity. A child window cannot exist alone and needs to be attached to a specific parent window. The window of the public interface is also called the system window, including the recently run dialog box, shutdown dialog box, status bar drop-down bar, lock screen interface, etc. The system window does not belong to any application and has nothing to do with Activity.

参考图3中的(b)所示，窗口就是屏幕上的一块矩形区域，可以显示用户界面(userinterface，UI)和与用户交互。在一些实施例中，窗口也可以将用户界面(即软件的操作界面)隐藏起来，在用户需要操作时再快速为用户展现应用导航和功能操作，或者根据触发的指令再度展开应用的操作界面。从系统的角度看，窗口其实是一个画布(surface)。一个屏幕可以有多个窗口，而这多个窗口的布局和顺序以及窗口动画是由窗口管理服务WMS管理的，多个画布内容混合和显示则是由SurfaceFlinger服务实现的。窗口是分层的，层级大的会覆盖在层级小的窗口上面。例如图3中的(b)所示的Z轴，其大小表示不同窗口显示的顺序，每个窗口都有对应的z-order。窗口的z-order值越大，显示的位置越在上面。SurfaceFlinger服务将多块画布的内容按照z-order进行混合并输出显示。应理解，本申请实施例仅以手机上的

系统为例描述相应的窗口管理机制，本申请实施提供的应用窗口显示方法可以应用于其他操作系统例如

等，也可以应用于其他电子设备例如个人计算机(personal computer，PC)上，如平板电脑、台式机、笔记本电脑、超级移动PC、上网本等。对于不同的电子设备、不同的操作系统，窗口管理机制可能不同，具体需要根据实际情况采用相应技术创建和管理窗口。本申请在此仅做示例性说明，不应理解为对本申请的限定。Referring to (b) in FIG. 3 , a window is a rectangular area on the screen, which can display a user interface (user interface, UI) and interact with the user. In some embodiments, the window can also hide the user interface (ie, the operation interface of the software), and quickly display the application navigation and function operations for the user when the user needs to operate, or re-expand the application operation interface according to the triggered instruction. From the system's point of view, the window is actually a canvas (surface). A screen can have multiple windows, and the layout and order of these multiple windows and window animation are managed by the window management service WMS, and the mixing and display of multiple canvas content is implemented by the SurfaceFlinger service. Windows are layered, with larger layers overlaying smaller windows. For example, the size of the Z-axis shown in (b) of FIG. 3 indicates the order in which different windows are displayed, and each window has a corresponding z-order. The larger the z-order value of the window, the higher the display position. The SurfaceFlinger service mixes the contents of multiple canvases in z-order and outputs them for display. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application only use the mobile phone

The system is used as an example to describe the corresponding window management mechanism. The application window display method provided by the implementation of this application can be applied to other operating systems, such as

etc., and can also be applied to other electronic devices such as personal computers (PCs), such as tablet computers, desktop computers, notebook computers, super mobile PCs, netbooks, and the like. For different electronic devices and different operating systems, the window management mechanism may be different, and specific technologies need to be used to create and manage windows according to the actual situation. The present application is only illustratively described herein, and should not be construed as a limitation on the present application.

返回参考图2，内容提供器用来存放和获取数据，并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频，图像，音频，拨打和接听的电话，浏览历史和书签，电话簿等。Referring back to Figure 2, a content provider is used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications. The data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.

视图系统包括可视控件，例如显示文字的控件，显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如，包括短信通知图标的显示界面，可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. View systems can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, the display interface including the short message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.

电话管理器用于提供电子设备100的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通，挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device 100 . For example, the management of call status (including connecting, hanging up, etc.).

资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源，比如本地化字符串，图标，图片，布局文件，视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localization strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files and so on.

通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息，可以用于传达告知类型的消息，可以短暂停留后自动消失，无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成，消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知，例如后台运行的应用程序的通知，还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息，发出提示音，电子设备振动，指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear automatically after a brief pause without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also display notifications in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of graphs or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, and notifications on the screen in the form of dialog windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a prompt sound is issued, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.

系统运行库层(libraries)可以分成两部分，分别是系统库和Android运行时。The system runtime library layer (libraries) can be divided into two parts, namely the system library and the Android runtime.

安卓运行时(Android runtime)即Android运行环境，包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。核心库包含两部分：一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数，另一部分是安卓的核心库。应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理，堆栈管理，线程管理，安全和异常的管理，以及垃圾回收等功能。Android runtime (Android runtime) is the Android runtime environment, including core libraries and virtual machines. The Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system. The core library consists of two parts: one is the function functions that the java language needs to call, and the other is the core library of Android. The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, safety and exception management, and garbage collection.

系统库是应用程序框架的支撑，是连接应用程序框架层与内核层的重要纽带，可包括多个功能模块，如表面管理器(surface manager)，媒体库(media libraries)，三维图形处理库(例如：面向嵌入式系统的开放式图形库(open graphics library for embeddedsystems，OpenGL ES))，2D图形引擎(例如：Skia数据库(skia graphics library，SGL))等。The system library is the support of the application framework and an important link between the application framework layer and the kernel layer. It can include multiple functional modules, such as surface manager, media library, 3D graphics processing library ( For example: open graphics library for embedded systems (open graphics library for embedded systems, OpenGL ES)), 2D graphics engine (for example: Skia database (skia graphics library, SGL)), etc.

表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理，并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。媒体库支持多种常用的音频，视频格式回放和录制，以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式，例如:MPEG4，H.264，MP3，AAC，AMR，JPG，PNG等。三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图，图像渲染，合成，和图层处理等。2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。The Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications. The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc. The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing. 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.

内核层是硬件和软件之间的层，用于提供操作系统的本质功能例如文件管理、内存管理、进程管理、网络协议栈等。内核层至少包含显示驱动，摄像头驱动，音频驱动，传感器驱动、蓝牙驱动等。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software, which is used to provide essential functions of the operating system such as file management, memory management, process management, network protocol stack, etc. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, sensor driver, Bluetooth driver, etc.

为方便理解，本申请以下实施例将以具有图1和图2所示结构的电子设备为例，结合附图和应用场景，对本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法进行具体阐述。For ease of understanding, the following embodiments of the present application will take the electronic device having the structure shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 as an example, and combine the drawings and application scenarios to specifically describe the application window display method provided by the embodiments of the present application.

随着电子设备技术的不断发展，电子设备例如手机、平板电脑等的屏幕尺寸越来越大，电子设备上安装的应用(application，App)也越来越多。为了满足用户的个性化需求，越来越多的电子设备支持多窗口模式(也叫多屏模式或分屏功能)，即在一个屏幕上能够同时运行并显示多个应用程序。电子设备的多窗口模式打开以后，用户可以将电子设备的屏幕进行分屏，例如将竖长的屏幕分成上下两个窗口，或者将横长的屏幕分成左右两个窗口，其中每个窗口中独立运行一个应用程序，两个应用程序互不影响。With the continuous development of electronic device technologies, the screen sizes of electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablet computers are getting larger and larger, and more and more applications (application, App) are installed on the electronic devices. In order to meet the personalized needs of users, more and more electronic devices support a multi-window mode (also called a multi-screen mode or a split-screen function), that is, multiple applications can be simultaneously run and displayed on one screen. After the multi-window mode of the electronic device is turned on, the user can split the screen of the electronic device, for example, dividing the vertical screen into two upper and lower windows, or dividing the horizontal screen into two left and right windows, in which each window is independent. Run one application without affecting each other.

当电子设备处于多窗口模式时，应用窗口的显示方式包括全屏显示、分屏显示、悬浮显示。When the electronic device is in the multi-window mode, the display modes of the application window include full-screen display, split-screen display, and floating display.

全屏显示，也称全屏模式，指的是屏幕上只显示一个应用窗口，并且该应用的界面填满整个屏幕。本申请实施例中，当某个窗口全屏显示时，定义该窗口的状态为全屏状态，相应地，定义该窗口所显示的应用为全屏显示应用。Full-screen display, also known as full-screen mode, means that only one application window is displayed on the screen, and the application's interface fills the entire screen. In the embodiment of the present application, when a window is displayed in full screen, the state of the window is defined as a full screen state, and correspondingly, the application displayed in the window is defined as a full screen display application.

分屏显示，也称分屏模式，指的是两个或两个以上的应用窗口分别占据屏幕的一部分，任意两个应用窗口之间不重叠，每个应用窗口可以改变大小，应用窗口的位置或者不可移动，或者仅能实现固定位置的移动，例如交换两个应用窗口的位置。本申请实施例中，当某个窗口分屏显示时，定义该窗口的状态为分屏状态，相应地，定义该窗口所显示的应用为分屏显示应用。Split-screen display, also known as split-screen mode, refers to two or more application windows occupying part of the screen respectively, any two application windows do not overlap each other, each application window can be resized, and the position of the application window can be changed. Either it is immovable, or it can only move in a fixed position, such as exchanging the positions of two application windows. In this embodiment of the present application, when a window is displayed in a split screen, the state of the window is defined as a split screen state, and correspondingly, the application displayed in the window is defined as a split screen display application.

悬浮显示，也称悬浮模式，指的是至少一个应用窗口悬浮显示于其他用户界面之上，并部分覆盖其他用户界面，在用户未对悬浮显示的应用窗口进行操作的情况下，该悬浮显示的应用窗口保持在固定位置且不随其他用户界面的改变而改变。该至少一个应用窗口在屏幕上层叠显示，应用窗口之间可以部分或全部覆盖，每个应用窗口既可以改变大小，也可以移动。本申请实施例中，当某个窗口悬浮显示时，例如悬浮在全屏显示的窗口之上或悬浮在分屏显示的窗口之上，定义该窗口的状态为悬浮状态，相应地，定义该窗口所显示的应用为悬浮显示应用。Floating display, also known as floating mode, refers to that at least one application window is suspended and displayed on top of other user interfaces and partially covers other user interfaces. If the user does not operate the application window displayed in suspension, the suspended display The application window remains in a fixed position and does not change with other user interface changes. The at least one application window is displayed in layers on the screen, and the application windows can be partially or completely covered, and each application window can be resized or moved. In this embodiment of the present application, when a certain window is displayed in suspension, for example, it is suspended above the window displayed in full screen or above the window displayed in split screen, the state of the window is defined as the suspended state, and correspondingly, the state of the window is defined as the suspended state. The displayed application is a floating display application.

为了便于理解，本申请将以电子设备为手机作为示例，首先介绍一些开启电子设备的多窗口模式的人机交互实施例。图4是本申请实施例提供的一组图形用户界面(graphical user interface，GUI)示意图。For ease of understanding, this application will take an electronic device as a mobile phone as an example, and firstly introduce some human-computer interaction embodiments for enabling the multi-window mode of the electronic device. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a set of graphical user interfaces (graphical user interface, GUI) provided by an embodiment of the present application.

参见图4中的(a)，图中示出了手机的解锁模式下，手机的屏幕显示系统显示的当前一种可能的界面内容201，该界面内容201可以为手机的主界面。该界面内容201显示了多款应用程序(application，App)，例如时钟、音乐、天气、日历、相册、聊天、相机、视频等。应理解，界面内容201还可以包括其他更多的应用程序，本申请不作限定。Referring to (a) of FIG. 4 , it is shown that in the unlocking mode of the mobile phone, apossible interface content 201 currently displayed by the system is displayed on the screen of the mobile phone, and theinterface content 201 may be the main interface of the mobile phone. Theinterface content 201 displays various applications (application, App), such as clock, music, weather, calendar, photo album, chat, camera, video and so on. It should be understood that theinterface content 201 may also include other more application programs, which is not limited in this application.

在一些实施例中，不限于手机的主界面，手机显示的界面内容可以是手机响应于输入的用户操作后所显示的界面内容，该用户操作可以包括用户对应用程序图标的点击操作，或者用户对应用程序界面内容中的控件的点击操作。例如，当用户点击手机的主界面显示的时钟、音乐、天气、日历、相册、聊天、相机、视频等应用图标后可以分别进入各应用程序相应的主界面。In some embodiments, not limited to the main interface of the mobile phone, the interface content displayed by the mobile phone may be the interface content displayed by the mobile phone in response to an input user operation. A click action on a control in the application interface content. For example, when the user clicks the clock, music, weather, calendar, photo album, chat, camera, video and other application icons displayed on the main interface of the mobile phone, they can enter the corresponding main interface of each application program respectively.

示例性的，用户执行图4中的(a)图所示的对视频应用的点击操作，响应于该点击操作，手机进入视频应用的主界面202，视频应用的主界面202可以显示如图4中(b)图所示的内容。该视频应用的主界面202可以包括电视剧、电影、综艺等多个节目选项。应理解，视频应用的主界面202还可以包括其他更多或更少或类似的显示内容，本申请对此不作限定。Exemplarily, the user performs the click operation on the video application as shown in (a) in FIG. 4 , and in response to the click operation, the mobile phone enters themain interface 202 of the video application, and themain interface 202 of the video application can be displayed as shown in FIG. 4 . The content shown in figure (b). Themain interface 202 of the video application may include multiple program options such as TV series, movies, and variety shows. It should be understood that themain interface 202 of the video application may also include other more or less or similar display contents, which is not limited in this application.

用户执行图4中的(b)图所示的对某个节目选项(例如“动漫F”)的点击操作，响应于该点击操作，手机进入视频播放界面203，该视频播放界面203可以显示如图4中(c)图所示的内容。在该视频播放界面203中，可以包括视频播放窗口、视频播放列表等。应理解，视频播放界面203还可以包括其他更多或更少或类似的显示内容，本申请对此不作限定。The user performs a click operation on a certain program option (for example, "Anime F") as shown in (b) in FIG. 4, and in response to the click operation, the mobile phone enters thevideo playback interface 203, and thevideo playback interface 203 can display the following: The content shown in (c) of Figure 4. Thevideo play interface 203 may include a video play window, a video play list, and the like. It should be understood that thevideo playing interface 203 may also include other more or less or similar display contents, which is not limited in this application.

此时如果用户想要在手机上同时运行并显示两个应用程序，例如用户想一边和朋友聊天，一边看视频，并且在聊天过程中不遮挡视频的观看，则用户可以执行分屏操作。响应于用户的分屏操作，手机可以进入分屏界面，分屏界面中屏幕被分成两个窗口，两个窗口分别独立运行两个应用程序，用户可以分别对两个窗口中显示的应用程序界面进行独立操作。示例性的，如图4中(d)所示，手机响应于用户的分屏操作后，进入分屏界面204。该分屏界面204包括第一窗口205和第二窗口206，第一窗口205和第二窗口206分别显示一个应用程序的用户界面。例如第一窗口205显示视频播放界面，第二窗口206显示聊天界面，用户可以一边在第一窗口205中观看电影或电视剧，一边在第二窗口206中聊天，在聊天的过程中不会中断视频的播放。应理解，本申请实施例中第一窗口205和第二窗口206显示的界面内容仅仅是示例性的，在实际应用中可以根据实际分屏的应用而显示相应的界面内容，本申请对此不作限定。At this time, if the user wants to run and display two applications on the mobile phone at the same time, for example, the user wants to chat with a friend while watching a video without blocking the viewing of the video during the chat, the user can perform a split screen operation. In response to the user's split-screen operation, the mobile phone can enter the split-screen interface. In the split-screen interface, the screen is divided into two windows, and the two windows run two applications independently. operate independently. Exemplarily, as shown in (d) of FIG. 4 , the mobile phone enters the split-screen interface 204 after responding to the user's split-screen operation. Thesplit screen interface 204 includes afirst window 205 and asecond window 206, and thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 respectively display a user interface of an application program. For example, thefirst window 205 displays a video playback interface, and thesecond window 206 displays a chat interface. The user can watch a movie or TV series in thefirst window 205 while chatting in thesecond window 206, and the video will not be interrupted during the chat. 's playback. It should be understood that the interface contents displayed in thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 in the embodiment of the present application are only exemplary, and in practical applications, corresponding interface contents may be displayed according to the actual split-screen application, which is not made in this application. limited.

用户能够执行的分屏操作方式有多种，下面仅作示例性说明。There are various split-screen operation modes that the user can perform, and the following is only an exemplary description.

在一种可能的方式中，用户可以通过按键实现分屏。例如，用户可以长按虚拟导航栏里的方框按键，响应于用户操作，手机可以将屏幕划分为两个窗口，在其中一个窗口显示用户当前正在使用的应用的界面，在另一个窗口显示用户选择的另一个应用的界面。或者，用户可以先调出后台，然后在后台点击分屏按键来实现快速分屏。In a possible way, the user can realize the split screen by pressing the button. For example, the user can long press the box button in the virtual navigation bar, and in response to the user's operation, the mobile phone can divide the screen into two windows, one window displays the interface of the application the user is currently using, and the other window displays the user's The interface of another app of your choice. Alternatively, the user can call out the background first, and then click the split screen button in the background to achieve quick split screen.

在一种可能的方式中，用户可以通过滑动实现分屏。例如，用户可以使用两指或三指从虚拟导航栏底部或屏幕底部向上滑动，响应于用户操作，手机执行分屏。In a possible way, the user can achieve split screen by swiping. For example, a user can use two or three fingers to swipe up from the bottom of the virtual navigation bar or the bottom of the screen, and in response to the user action, the phone performs a split screen.

在一种可能的方式中，用户可以通过手势实现分屏。例如用户可以用指关节轻敲并划过屏幕，响应于用户操作，手机可以从划线部位分割屏幕。In a possible way, the user can achieve split screen through gestures. For example, a user can tap and swipe across the screen with a knuckle, and in response to the user's action, the phone can split the screen from the swipe.

在一些实施例中，手机可以上下分屏，也可以左右分屏。示例性的，如图4中的(d)所示，当用户纵向使用竖长的手机进行分屏时，第一窗口205和第二窗口206可以呈上下并列显示。如图4中的(e)所示，当用户横向使用竖长的手机进行分屏时，第一窗口205和第二窗口206可以呈左右并排显示。在一些实施例中，如果手机开启了自动旋转功能，当手机的姿态发生变化(例如由纵向变为横向，或由横向变为纵向)时，分屏界面204上的窗口显示方式可以随之自动变化。应理解，在第一窗口205和第二窗口206中显示的应用界面可以根据窗口的大小适应性调整界面内容显示形式，本申请对此不作限定。In some embodiments, the mobile phone can be divided into upper and lower screens, and can also be divided into left and right screens. Exemplarily, as shown in (d) of FIG. 4 , when the user uses a vertically long mobile phone to split the screen, thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 can be displayed side by side. As shown in (e) of FIG. 4 , when the user uses a vertically long mobile phone to perform screen splitting, thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 can be displayed side by side. In some embodiments, if the mobile phone has the auto-rotation function turned on, when the posture of the mobile phone changes (for example, from portrait to landscape, or from landscape to portrait), the window display mode on thesplit screen interface 204 can be automatically followed accordingly. Variety. It should be understood that, the application interface displayed in thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 can adaptively adjust the display form of the interface content according to the size of the window, which is not limited in this application.

参考图4中的(d)和(e)，分屏界面204还包括设置于第一窗口205和第二窗口206之间的分隔条207，分隔条207用于分隔第一窗口205和第二窗口206，通过调整分隔条207的位置可以调节分屏比例大小或者实现退出分屏等。示例性的，用户可以拖动分隔条207上下移动(或左右移动)，在一定阈值范围内，当用户松开分隔条207后，分隔条207可以停留在用户手指离开的位置，这样第一窗口205和第二窗口206中，一个窗口尺寸减小，一个窗口尺寸增大。具体地，一个窗口在垂直于分隔条207的方向上的宽度减小，一个窗口在垂直于分隔条207的方向上的宽度增大。应理解，在拖动分隔条207的过程中，第一窗口205和第二窗口206中显示的应用界面会随着窗口的大小变化进行适应性调整，例如随着窗口比例增大，窗口内显示的应用界面会随之增大。Referring to (d) and (e) of FIG. 4 , thesplit screen interface 204 further includes a dividingbar 207 disposed between thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206, and the dividingbar 207 is used to separate thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 207. For thewindow 206, by adjusting the position of the dividingbar 207, the scale of the split screen can be adjusted or the exit of the split screen can be realized. Exemplarily, the user can drag thedivider bar 207 to move up and down (or left and right), within a certain threshold range, when the user releases thedivider bar 207, thedivider bar 207 can stay at the position where the user's finger left, so that thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206, the size of one window is decreased, and the size of the other window is increased. Specifically, the width of one window in the direction perpendicular to thedivider bar 207 decreases, and the width of one window in the direction perpendicular to thedivider bar 207 increases. It should be understood that in the process of dragging the dividingbar 207, the application interfaces displayed in thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 will be adaptively adjusted as the size of the windows changes. The application interface will increase accordingly.

图4中仅以竖长的手机为例描述了应用分屏的方式，随着电子设备技术的不断发展，目前电子设备例如手机、平板设备等的屏幕越来越大，上述应用分屏的方式对这些大屏电子设备同样适用。并且由于电子设备的屏幕越来越大，屏幕上同时运行的应用不限于两个，大屏可以被分成三个、四个、五个或者更多个窗口，每个窗口都可以独立运行并显示一个应用程序，大大提升了用户体验。为了便于理解和描述，以下实施例中将以电子设备为大屏设备例如平板设备或折叠屏设备为例进行说明，但应理解，本申请实施例技术方案可以应用于各种具有显示功能的电子设备上。Figure 4 only takes a vertically long mobile phone as an example to describe the way of applying split screen. With the continuous development of electronic device technology, the screens of current electronic devices such as mobile phones and tablet devices are getting larger and larger. The above-mentioned method of applying split screen The same applies to these large-screen electronic devices. And because the screen of electronic devices is getting bigger and bigger, the applications running on the screen at the same time are not limited to two, the large screen can be divided into three, four, five or more windows, and each window can run and display independently. An app that greatly enhances the user experience. For ease of understanding and description, in the following embodiments, the electronic device is a large-screen device, such as a tablet device or a folding screen device, as an example for description, but it should be understood that the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various electronic devices with display functions. on the device.

在两个分屏显示应用并行运行一段时间后，用户可能不需要再一直长时间使用两个应用，需要将暂时不使用的应用退出分屏。参考图4中的(e)，例如与用户聊天的朋友暂时离开，为了观看视频感受更好，用户需要退出分屏状态，将视频应用全屏显示。图5示出了现有几种将应用窗口退出分屏的方式。After the two split-screen display applications run in parallel for a period of time, the user may not need to use the two applications for a long time, and needs to exit the split-screen application that is not used temporarily. Referring to (e) in FIG. 4 , for example, a friend who is chatting with the user leaves temporarily. In order to have a better viewing experience of the video, the user needs to exit the split-screen state and display the video application in full screen. FIG. 5 shows several existing ways of exiting the application window from the split screen.

一种方式是直接将需要退出分屏状态的应用关闭。示例性的，参考图5中的(a)，用户可以点击分隔条207中间的按键，响应于用户操作，电子设备可以显示两个操作按键208和209，其中切换按键208用于交换第一窗口205和第二窗口206所显示的应用界面，关闭按键209用于关闭第一窗口205(即关闭第一窗口205中显示的应用)。如果用户想要关闭第二窗口206中显示的应用，用户可以先交换两个窗口显示的应用界面，然后再关闭第一窗口205中显示的交换后的应用。One way is to directly close the application that needs to exit the split-screen state. Exemplarily, referring to (a) in FIG. 5 , the user can click the button in the middle of theseparation bar 207, and in response to the user's operation, the electronic device can display twooperation buttons 208 and 209, wherein theswitch button 208 is used to exchange the first window. 205 and the application interface displayed in thesecond window 206, and theclose button 209 is used to close the first window 205 (ie, close the application displayed in the first window 205). If the user wants to close the application displayed in thesecond window 206 , the user can first exchange the application interfaces displayed in the two windows, and then close the exchanged application displayed in thefirst window 205 .

另一种方式是拖拽分屏应用窗口之间的分隔条，向屏幕边缘滑动，将想要退出分屏状态的应用窗口推挤出屏幕之外，从而退出分屏状态。示例性的，参考图5中的(b)所示，用户可以长按分隔条207中间的按键，一定时间后拖拽分隔条207向屏幕边缘移动。用户想要哪个应用窗口退出分屏状态，就将分隔条207向哪个应用窗口移动，直至将该应用窗口推挤出屏幕以外，就可以使该应用窗口退出分屏状态。Another way is to drag the divider between the split-screen application windows, slide to the edge of the screen, and push the application window you want to exit the split-screen state out of the screen, thereby exiting the split-screen state. Exemplarily, as shown in (b) of FIG. 5 , the user can long press the button in the middle of theseparation bar 207 and drag theseparation bar 207 to move toward the edge of the screen after a certain period of time. Which application window the user wants to exit the split-screen state, the user moves theseparation bar 207 to which application window until the application window is pushed out of the screen, and the application window can exit the split-screen state.

还有一种方式是拖曳分屏应用窗口上的拖曳条，将应用窗口由分屏状态转为悬浮窗状态。示例性的，参考图5中的(c)所示，第一窗口205和第二窗口206均包括一个分屏拖曳条210，用户拖动某个窗口上的分屏拖曳条210可以交换两个窗口所显示的应用，或者将被拖动的应用窗口变为悬浮窗形式。Another way is to drag the drag bar on the split-screen application window to change the application window from the split-screen state to the floating window state. Exemplarily, as shown in (c) of FIG. 5 , both thefirst window 205 and thesecond window 206 include a split-screen drag bar 210, and the user can drag the split-screen drag bar 210 on a certain window to exchange two The application displayed in the window, or the dragged application window becomes a floating window.

从上可以看出，如果用户采用关闭其中一个应用窗口的方式实现退出分屏，则两个窗口所显示的应用的状态都从分屏状态变为全屏状态，即其中一个应用(例如视频应用)在屏幕上全屏显示，另一个应用(例如聊天应用)退至后台运行。后续如果用户想再打开后台运行的应用，需要重新进行分屏操作，过程繁琐；或者用户直接打开应用进行全屏显示，则当前全屏显示的应用会被暂停。例如用户和朋友一边聊天一边看视频，朋友临时离开一阵，用户退出分屏状态，将视频应用全屏显示。后来用户再接收到对方的消息时，点开聊天应用，聊天应用只能全屏显示，用户会中断当前的视频观看流程，用户体验较差。As can be seen from the above, if the user exits the split screen by closing one of the application windows, the status of the applications displayed in the two windows will change from the split screen state to the full screen state, that is, one of the applications (such as a video application) Full screen on the screen, another app (such as a chat app) goes to the background. Subsequently, if the user wants to open the application running in the background again, the split-screen operation needs to be performed again, which is a cumbersome process; or if the user directly opens the application for full-screen display, the current full-screen application will be suspended. For example, a user and a friend watch a video while chatting, the friend temporarily leaves for a while, the user exits the split-screen state, and the video application is displayed in full screen. Later, when the user receives a message from the other party and clicks on the chat application, the chat application can only be displayed in full screen, the user will interrupt the current video viewing process, and the user experience is poor.

如果用户通过拖动分屏拖曳条将分屏显示应用变为悬浮显示应用，虽然用户可以在不中断当前应用流程的情况下使用另一个应用，但从图5中的(c)可以看到，分屏拖曳条210位于分屏窗口的上方，占用显示空间。若将分屏拖曳条210的位置和信号栏的位置共用，基于安卓系统的开发框架，会存在和信号栏热区冲突问题。If the user changes the split-screen display application into a floating display application by dragging the split-screen drag bar, although the user can use another application without interrupting the current application process, it can be seen from (c) in Figure 5 that, The split-screen drag bar 210 is located above the split-screen window, occupying display space. If the position of the split-screen drag bar 210 is shared with the position of the signal bar, based on the development framework of the Android system, there will be a problem of conflict with the hot area of the signal bar.

因此，本申请实施例将提供一种应用窗口显示方法，可以方便用户退出分屏状态，并且当用户后续需要重新同时使用多个应用时，能够在不切换应用或中断当前应用任务的情况下快速开启，提升了用户体验。Therefore, the embodiments of the present application will provide a method for displaying an application window, which can facilitate the user to exit the split-screen state, and when the user subsequently needs to use multiple applications at the same time, it can quickly switch applications or interrupt the current application task. It is turned on to improve the user experience.

图6示出了本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图。为方便理解和描绘，本申请实施例以电子设备屏幕被分为两个应用窗口为例进行说明。FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. For the convenience of understanding and description, the embodiments of the present application are described by taking an example that the screen of the electronic device is divided into two application windows.

如图6中的(a)所示，分屏界面300包括第一窗口301、第二窗口302和用于分隔第一窗口301和第二窗口302的分隔条303。第一窗口301和第二窗口302均为分屏状态，两个窗口分别独立运行并显示各自的应用，其中第一窗口301运行的应用为第一应用，第二窗口302运行的应用为第二应用。当用户想要暂时退出分屏状态时，用户可以执行如图6中的(b)所示的对分隔条303的拖动操作。当电子设备检测到用户的手指(或触控笔)触摸分隔条303时，响应于该操作，电子设备将分隔条303向需要退出分屏状态的应用窗口一侧移动，其中被挤压的应用窗口的宽度减小，被拉伸的应用窗口的宽度增加。当电子设备检测到用户的手指离开分隔条303时，若此时分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口悬浮显示于其他应用窗口之上。As shown in (a) of FIG. 6 , thesplit screen interface 300 includes afirst window 301 , asecond window 302 , and aseparation bar 303 for separating thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 . Thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 are both in a split-screen state, and the two windows run independently and display their respective applications. The application running in thefirst window 301 is the first application, and the application running in thesecond window 302 is the second application. application. When the user wants to temporarily exit the split screen state, the user may perform a drag operation on thedivider bar 303 as shown in (b) in FIG. 6 . When the electronic device detects that the user's finger (or stylus) touches thedivider bar 303, in response to the operation, the electronic device moves thedivider bar 303 to the side of the application window that needs to exit the split-screen state, where the squeezed application The width of the window decreases, and the width of the stretched application window increases. When the electronic device detects that the user's finger leaves theseparation bar 303 , if the position of theseparation bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device can suspend the squeezed application window on top of other application windows.

示例性的，参考图6(b)所示，用户拖动分隔条303向第二窗口302一侧移动，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，若用户停止触摸操作，电子设备将第一窗口301由分屏状态切换为全屏状态，将第二窗口302由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6( b ), the user drags thedivider bar 303 to move to the side of thesecond window 302 , when the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, if the user stops touching the Operation, the electronic device switches thefirst window 301 from the split-screen state to the full-screen state, and switches thesecond window 302 from the split-screen state to the floating state.

本申请实施例中，分隔条303的位置所满足的第一预设条件可以有多种形式。In this embodiment of the present application, the first preset condition satisfied by the position of thepartition bar 303 may have various forms.

在一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值。也就是说，当电子设备检测到分隔条303与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值时，在用户停止触摸操作后，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口(即分隔条303与距离分隔条303最近的屏幕边缘之间的应用窗口，或者说尺寸相对较小的应用窗口)切换为悬浮状态。应理解，上述屏幕边缘指的是屏幕上与分隔条平行的边缘。In an example, the first preset condition includes: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first threshold. That is, when the electronic device detects that the distance between theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first threshold, after the user stops the touch operation, the electronic device will squeeze the application window (ie theseparation bar 303 and the distance separation bar). 303 The application window between the nearest screen edges, or an application window with a relatively small size) is switched to a floating state. It should be understood that the above-mentioned screen edge refers to the edge on the screen that is parallel to the dividing bar.

应理解，用户可以关闭任意一个分屏状态的应用窗口，只要检测到分隔条与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值，当用户停止触摸操作后，就可以将分隔条与所述屏幕边缘之间的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。It should be understood that the user can close any application window in the split-screen state. As long as the distance between the split bar and the edge of the screen is detected to be less than or equal to the first threshold, after the user stops the touch operation, the distance between the split bar and the edge of the screen can be removed. The application window in between is switched to a floating state.

可选地，第一阈值大于或等于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width.

示例性的，第一阈值可以为上述范围中的定值，例如第一阈值取以下值中的任意一个：1/5屏幕宽度、1/6屏幕宽度、1/8个屏幕宽度、1/10屏幕宽度、1/12屏幕宽度、1/15屏幕宽度、1/16屏幕宽度、0等。Exemplarily, the first threshold may be a fixed value in the above range, for example, the first threshold may take any one of the following values: 1/5 screen width, 1/6 screen width, 1/8 screen width, 1/10 Screen width, 1/12 screen width, 1/15 screen width, 1/16 screen width, 0, etc.

示例性的，第一阈值的范围可以进一步缩小，例如第一阈值大于或等于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。例如，第一阈值大于或等于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/16个屏幕宽度。例如，第一阈值大于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。Exemplarily, the range of the first threshold may be further narrowed, for example, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width. For example, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/16 of the screen width. For example, the first threshold is greater than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width.

应理解，上述屏幕宽度指的是屏幕在垂直分隔条的方向上的宽度。It should be understood that the above-mentioned screen width refers to the width of the screen in the direction of the vertical separation bar.

应理解，在具体实现中可以有多种方式表示第一阈值与屏幕宽度的关系，例如通过坐标值表示，或者通过像素点数表示等，本申请实施例不做限定。It should be understood that the relationship between the first threshold and the screen width may be represented in various ways in specific implementations, for example, represented by coordinate values, or represented by the number of pixels, etc., which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

需要说明的是，不同的电子设备可能具有不同尺寸的屏幕，因此本领域技术人员可以可以根据电子设备的屏幕尺寸相应确定第一阈值的大小。It should be noted that different electronic devices may have screens of different sizes, so those skilled in the art can correspondingly determine the size of the first threshold according to the screen size of the electronic device.

在另一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：应用窗口在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第三阈值。也就是说，当电子设备检测到应用窗口(例如图6中的(b)所示的第二窗口302)在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第三阈值时，在用户停止触摸操作后，电子设备将该应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。In another example, the first preset condition includes: a width of the application window in a direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is less than or equal to a third threshold. That is, when the electronic device detects that the width of the application window (for example, thesecond window 302 shown in (b) in FIG. 6 ) in the direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is less than or equal to the third threshold, the user stops the After the touch operation, the electronic device switches the application window to a floating state.

应理解，电子设备可以关闭任意一个分屏状态的应用窗口，只要检测到某个应用窗口的宽度小于第三阈值，当用户停止触摸操作后，则将该应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。该示例中，第三阈值的取值可以参考上述示例中第一阈值的取值，在此不再赘述。It should be understood that the electronic device can close any application window in the split-screen state. As long as the width of an application window is detected to be smaller than the third threshold, when the user stops the touch operation, the application window is switched to the floating state. In this example, for the value of the third threshold, reference may be made to the value of the first threshold in the foregoing example, and details are not described herein again.

在另一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303位于第一预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。其中分隔条303的位置、第一预设位置以及屏幕边缘位置可以用二维平面坐标表示，根据分隔条303的坐标判断分隔条303的位置是否满足第一预设条件。对应于屏幕显示的多个应用窗口，第一预设位置可以有多个，不同的第一预设位置，其对应的第一预设坐标值不同。这里屏幕的坐标原点可以设置在屏幕的四角、四边、中心或其他位置，分隔条303的位置坐标取值、第一预设位置的坐标取值根据坐标原点的位置相应确定。实际应用中，可以根据分屏方式例如上下分屏或左右分屏，确定使用分隔条303所在位置的横坐标或纵坐标。In another example, the first preset condition includes: theseparation bar 303 is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device. The position of the dividingbar 303 , the first preset position and the position of the screen edge can be represented by two-dimensional plane coordinates, and whether the position of the dividingbar 303 satisfies the first preset condition is determined according to the coordinates of the dividingbar 303 . Corresponding to multiple application windows displayed on the screen, there may be multiple first preset positions, and different first preset positions have different first preset coordinate values. Here, the coordinate origin of the screen can be set at the four corners, sides, center or other positions of the screen, and the position coordinate value of the dividingbar 303 and the coordinate value of the first preset position are determined according to the position of the coordinate origin. In practical applications, the abscissa or ordinate of the position where thepartition bar 303 is used may be determined according to the screen splitting method, such as upper and lower screen splitting or left and right splitting.

以图6中的(b)为例，设定电子设备屏幕的横向坐标为X坐标，电子设备屏幕的纵向坐标为Y坐标。以分屏界面300为左右分屏为例，当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值大于或等于第一预设坐标值(即第一预设位置的X坐标)A时，在用户停止触摸操作后，电子设备将X坐标值大于或等于第一预设坐标值A的应用窗口(例如第二窗口302)切换为悬浮状态。这里相当于用户对分屏界面上的右侧应用窗口进行操作。类似地，当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值小于或等于第一预设坐标值(即第一预设位置的X坐标)B时，在用户停止触摸操作后，电子设备将X坐标值小于或等于第一预设坐标值B的应用窗口(例如第一窗口301)切换为悬浮状态。这里相当于用户对分屏界面上的左侧应用窗口进行操作。当分屏界面300为上下分屏时，电子设备则将分隔条303所在位置的Y坐标值与第一预设位置的Y坐标作比较，具体过程与分屏界面为左右分屏的情况类似，不再赘述。Taking (b) in FIG. 6 as an example, the horizontal coordinate of the electronic device screen is set as the X coordinate, and the vertical coordinate of the electronic device screen is set as the Y coordinate. Taking thesplit screen interface 300 as a left and right split screen as an example, when the electronic device detects that the X coordinate value of the position where thedivider bar 303 is located is greater than or equal to the first preset coordinate value (that is, the X coordinate of the first preset position) A, After the user stops the touch operation, the electronic device switches the application window (eg, the second window 302 ) whose X coordinate value is greater than or equal to the first preset coordinate value A to the floating state. This is equivalent to the user operating the right application window on the split-screen interface. Similarly, when the electronic device detects that the X coordinate value of the position where thepartition bar 303 is located is less than or equal to the first preset coordinate value (that is, the X coordinate of the first preset position) B, after the user stops the touch operation, the electronic device will An application window whose X coordinate value is less than or equal to the first preset coordinate value B (eg, the first window 301 ) is switched to a floating state. This is equivalent to the user operating the left application window on the split screen interface. When thesplit screen interface 300 is an upper and lower split screen, the electronic device compares the Y coordinate value of the position of the dividingbar 303 with the Y coordinate of the first preset position. The specific process is similar to the case where the split screen interface is a left and right split screen. Repeat.

本申请实施例中，被挤压的应用窗口变成悬浮状态时可以有多种悬浮方式。In the embodiment of the present application, when the squeezed application window becomes a suspended state, there may be various suspension modes.

作为一个示例，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮窗状态。参考图6中的(c)所示，电子设备将第二窗口302由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态时，第二窗口302为悬浮窗状态，即第二窗口302中显示的应用变为悬浮显示应用。变为悬浮窗状态的第二窗口302占用屏幕的部分显示空间，并且可以在第一窗口301上移动，第一窗口301和第二窗口302仍旧独立运行各自的应用，互不影响。这样当用户退出分屏状态后，其中一个分屏状态的应用窗口变为全屏状态，另一个分屏状态的应用窗口变为悬浮窗状态，悬浮窗状态的窗口只占用屏幕的部分显示空间，不影响用户观看全屏显示的应用。并且用户可以随时在悬浮窗口上操作，大大提升用户体验。As an example, the electronic device may switch the squeezed application window from a split-screen state to a floating window state. Referring to (c) in FIG. 6 , when the electronic device switches thesecond window 302 from a split-screen state to a floating state, thesecond window 302 is in a floating window state, that is, the application displayed in thesecond window 302 becomes a floating display. application. Thesecond window 302 in the floating window state occupies part of the display space of the screen and can be moved on thefirst window 301. Thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 still run their respective applications independently without affecting each other. In this way, when the user exits the split-screen state, one of the application windows in the split-screen state becomes the full-screen state, and the other application window in the split-screen state becomes the floating window state. Apps that prevent users from viewing full screen displays. And users can operate on the floating window at any time, which greatly improves the user experience.

应理解，当第二窗口302变为悬浮窗状态时，第二窗口302所显示的第二应用在前台运行，用户可以同时使用第一窗口301显示的第一应用和第二窗口302显示的第二应用。It should be understood that when thesecond window 302 becomes a floating window state, the second application displayed in thesecond window 302 runs in the foreground, and the user can use the first application displayed in thefirst window 301 and the first application displayed in thesecond window 302 at the same time. Second application.

作为另一个示例，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮球状态，处于悬浮球状态的应用窗口，其应用的用户界面是隐藏起来的。参考图6中的(d)所示，电子设备将第二窗口302由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态时，第二窗口302为悬浮球状态，具体地可以为悬浮图标，即第二窗口302中显示的第二应用变为悬浮显示应用。变为悬浮球状态的第二窗口302由于将第二应用的用户界面隐藏，只用一个悬浮图标形式来标识窗口位置，因此只占用屏幕的很小一部分显示空间，并且可以在第一窗口301上移动。这样用户退出分屏状态后，其中一个分屏状态的应用窗口变为全屏状态，另一个分屏状态的应用窗口变为悬浮球状态，悬浮球状态的窗口只占用屏幕很小的显示空间，不影响用户观看全屏显示的应用(例如第一应用)。并且用户可以随时对悬浮球进行操作，调出窗口所显示的应用(例如第二应用)的用户界面，大大提升用户体验。As another example, the electronic device may switch the squeezed application window from the split-screen state to the floating ball state, and the application user interface of the application window in the floating ball state is hidden. Referring to (d) in FIG. 6 , when the electronic device switches thesecond window 302 from a split-screen state to a floating state, thesecond window 302 is in a floating ball state, specifically a floating icon, that is, in thesecond window 302 The displayed second application becomes the floating display application. Since thesecond window 302 in the floating ball state hides the user interface of the second application and only uses a floating icon to identify the window position, it only occupies a small part of the display space of the screen, and can be displayed on thefirst window 301 move. In this way, after the user exits the split-screen state, one of the application windows in the split-screen state becomes the full-screen state, and the other application window in the split-screen state becomes the floating ball state. The window in the floating ball state only occupies a small display space on the screen and does not Affects the user to view an application (eg, the first application) displayed in full screen. In addition, the user can operate the floating ball at any time to call up the user interface of the application (eg, the second application) displayed in the window, which greatly improves the user experience.

应理解，当第二窗口302变为悬浮球状态时，第二窗口302所显示的第二应用在后台运行，第二应用的用户界面为隐藏状态。因此，本申请实施例中将悬浮球或悬浮图标可以看做是一种隐藏用户界面的应用窗口。It should be understood that when thesecond window 302 becomes the floating ball state, the second application displayed on thesecond window 302 runs in the background, and the user interface of the second application is in a hidden state. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the floating ball or the floating icon may be regarded as an application window that hides the user interface.

可选地，当第二窗口302切换为悬浮球状态时，若第二窗口302所运行的应用接收到新消息时，电子设备通过悬浮球提示用户，例如在悬浮球上显示数字或在悬浮球上显示红点等。本申请实施例中的悬浮球自身带有用户与应用交互时所需要的部分功能，可以实现随时响应、轻量提示的目的。Optionally, when thesecond window 302 is switched to the floating ball state, if the application running on thesecond window 302 receives a new message, the electronic device prompts the user through the floating ball, such as displaying numbers on the floating ball or displaying a number on the floating ball. Displays red dots, etc. The suspension ball in the embodiment of the present application has some functions required when the user interacts with the application, and can achieve the purpose of responding at any time and light-weight prompting.

在一些实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以通过振动反馈、文字提示和界面变化中的至少一种方式提示用户应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。In some embodiments, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may prompt the user that the application window will be switched to a suspended state.

在一个示例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以通过振动提示用户应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。In one example, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may notify the user that the application window will be switched to a floating state through vibration.

在另一个示例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以通过“正在将视频切换为悬浮窗”、“正在将视频切换为悬浮图标”等文字提示用户应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。In another example, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may give a text prompt such as "switching the video to a floating window", "switching the video to a floating icon", etc. The user application window will be switched to a floating state.

在又一个示例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以对被挤压的应用窗口进行模糊处理、灰度处理或增加图层蒙版等，参考图6中的(b)所示的第二窗口302，这样可以提示用户分隔条303位置已满足第一预设条件，如果用户此时停止触摸，电子设备会将被处理的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。In yet another example, when the electronic device detects that the position of the dividingbar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may perform blurring processing, grayscale processing, or adding a layer mask to the squeezed application window, etc., refer to Thesecond window 302 shown in (b) of FIG. 6 can remind the user that the position of thepartition bar 303 has met the first preset condition. If the user stops touching at this time, the electronic device will switch the processed application window to floating state.

在又一个示例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以隐藏被挤压的应用窗口，并在被挤压的应用窗口所对应的位置上显示其切换为悬浮状态时的缩略图。参考图7中的(a)所示，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备在屏幕上的提示区域304中显示第二窗口302切换为悬浮窗时的缩略图。这里提示区域304即为第二窗口302被隐藏前在屏幕上所占据的区域。类似地，参考图7中的(c)所示，在第二窗口302被切换为悬浮球状态的情况下，电子设备在屏幕上的提示区域304中可以显示第二窗口302切换为悬浮球时的缩略图(例如悬浮图标)。In yet another example, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device can hide the squeezed application window, and display the squeezed application window at the position corresponding to the squeezed application window. Thumbnail when toggled to floating state. Referring to (a) in FIG. 7 , when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays in theprompt area 304 on the screen when thesecond window 302 is switched to a floating window. Thumbnail. Here, theprompt area 304 is the area occupied on the screen before thesecond window 302 is hidden. Similarly, as shown in (c) of FIG. 7 , when thesecond window 302 is switched to the floating ball state, the electronic device can display in theprompt area 304 on the screen when thesecond window 302 is switched to the floating ball state 's thumbnail (such as a hover icon).

可选地，在用户拖动分隔条303的过程中，当提示区域304的宽度不足以完整显示被挤压的应用窗口的悬浮状态缩略图时，或者提示区域304的宽度小于预设宽度时，或者分隔条303所满足的第一预设条件为分隔条303位于屏幕边缘时，被挤压的应用窗口的悬浮状态缩略图可以在另一个应用窗口之上显示。参考图7中的(b)和(d)所示，当用于显示第二窗口302的悬浮窗状态缩略图(或第二窗口302的悬浮球状态缩略图)的区域宽度不足或小于预设宽度时，第二窗口302的悬浮状态缩略图可以直接在第一窗口301之上显示，覆盖第一窗口301的部分用户界面。Optionally, when the user drags thedivider bar 303, when the width of theprompt area 304 is not enough to completely display the floating state thumbnail of the squeezed application window, or when the width of theprompt area 304 is smaller than the preset width, Or the first preset condition satisfied by thedivider bar 303 is that when thedivider bar 303 is located at the edge of the screen, the floating state thumbnail of the squeezed application window can be displayed on top of another application window. Referring to (b) and (d) in FIG. 7 , when the width of the area used to display the floating window state thumbnail of the second window 302 (or the floating ball state thumbnail of the second window 302 ) is insufficient or smaller than the preset width When the width of thesecond window 302 is in the floating state, the thumbnail image of thesecond window 302 can be directly displayed on thefirst window 301 , covering part of the user interface of thefirst window 301 .

可选地，在用户拖动分隔条303的过程中，电子设备可以不对分屏界面做任何处理。直到检测到分隔条303位于屏幕边缘时，电子设备在第一窗口301之上显示第二窗口302在悬浮状态下的缩略图。Optionally, during the process of the user dragging the dividingbar 303, the electronic device may not perform any processing on the split screen interface. Until it is detected that the dividingbar 303 is located at the edge of the screen, the electronic device displays the thumbnail image of thesecond window 302 in the suspended state above thefirst window 301 .

用户在拖动分隔条的过程中，可以通过以下几种方式确定即将被切换为悬浮状态的应用窗口或应用。During the process of dragging the divider bar, the user can determine the application window or application to be switched to the floating state in the following ways.

在一些实施例中，在用户拖动分隔条的过程中，用户可以通过应用窗口中显示的用户界面确定每个应用窗口所运行的应用。根据分屏比例的变化或者分隔条的位置，用户可以判断出哪个应用窗口(或哪个应用)正在被切换为悬浮状态，哪个应用窗口(或哪个应用)正在被切换为全屏状态。这种情况下，在用户操作过程中，应用窗口中运行的应用可以不被中断或暂停，用户在使用应用过程中即可以退出分屏状态。示例性的，参考图6和图7所示，当用户在观影或听音乐过程中退出分屏状态时，被全屏显示的应用(例如第一应用)没有被暂停，因此不影响用户观看影片和音乐收听等。In some embodiments, during the process of the user dragging the divider bar, the user can determine the application run by each application window through the user interface displayed in the application window. According to the change of the split screen ratio or the position of the divider bar, the user can determine which application window (or which application) is being switched to the floating state and which application window (or which application) is being switched to the full-screen state. In this case, during the user operation, the application running in the application window may not be interrupted or suspended, and the user may exit the split-screen state while using the application. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 , when the user exits the split-screen state while watching a movie or listening to music, the application displayed in full screen (for example, the first application) is not suspended, so it does not affect the user’s viewing of the movie. and music listening etc.

在一些实施例中，在用户拖动分隔条的过程中，电子设备可以在应用窗口对应的位置标识该应用窗口所运行的应用，方便用户确定哪个应用窗口(或哪个应用)正在被切换为悬浮状态，哪个应用窗口(或哪个应用)正在被切换为全屏状态。示例性的，参考图8所示，当用户执行如图8中的(a)图所示的对分隔条303的点击或长按操作，响应于用户操作，电子设备可以对第一窗口301和第二窗口302进行模糊处理、灰度处理或增加图层蒙版等，并且在第一窗口301和第二窗口302对应的位置显示应用标识。示例性的，电子设备可以显示如图8中的(b)图所示的分屏界面。其中第一窗口301运行的是视频应用，第二窗口302运行的是聊天应用，则电子设备在第一窗口301对应的窗口位置显示视频应用标识，在第二窗口302对应的窗口位置显示聊天应用标识。这种情况下，在用户操作过程中，根据应用标识和分隔条的位置，用户可以判断出每个应用窗口所运行的应用以及窗口即将发生的状态切换等。特别地，当用户使用的分屏应用具有相似的用户界面，或者用户使用的分屏应用为两个分身应用(即应用相同，但可以独立运行)时，用户通过应用标识可以很容易确定当下执行的操作是否能够实现自己想要的效果。In some embodiments, during the process of the user dragging the separator bar, the electronic device may identify the application running in the application window at the corresponding position of the application window, so as to facilitate the user to determine which application window (or which application) is being switched to floating state, which application window (or which application) is being switched to fullscreen. Exemplarily, referring to FIG. 8 , when the user performs a click or long-press operation on theseparation bar 303 as shown in (a) of FIG. 8 , in response to the user operation, the electronic device Thesecond window 302 is subjected to blurring processing, grayscale processing, or adding a layer mask, etc., and an application logo is displayed at positions corresponding to thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 . Exemplarily, the electronic device may display a split screen interface as shown in (b) of FIG. 8 . Wherein thefirst window 301 runs a video application, and thesecond window 302 runs a chat application, then the electronic device displays the video application identifier in the window position corresponding to thefirst window 301, and displays the chat application in the window position corresponding to thesecond window 302 logo. In this case, during the user's operation, the user can determine the application running in each application window and the upcoming state switching of the window, etc., according to the application identifier and the position of the partition bar. In particular, when the split-screen application used by the user has a similar user interface, or the split-screen application used by the user is two split-screen applications (that is, the applications are the same, but can run independently), the user can easily determine the current execution through the application identification whether the operation can achieve the desired effect.

可选地，在分隔条303的位置不满足第一预设条件时，应用窗口对应位置可以一直显示应用标识，例如图8中的(c)所示。Optionally, when the position of thepartition bar 303 does not satisfy the first preset condition, the corresponding position of the application window may always display the application logo, such as shown in (c) of FIG. 8 .

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，与图7中的(a)、(c)类似，电子设备可以隐藏被挤压的应用窗口，并在被挤压的应用窗口所对应的位置上显示其切换为悬浮状态时的缩略图。参考图8中的(d)所示，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备在屏幕上的提示区域304中显示第二窗口302切换为悬浮窗(或者悬浮球)时的缩略图。这里提示区域304即为第二窗口302被隐藏前在屏幕上所占据的区域。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, similar to (a) and (c) in FIG. The thumbnail of the squeezed application window when it is switched to the floating state is displayed at the position corresponding to the squeezed application window. Referring to (d) in FIG. 8 , when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays thesecond window 302 in theprompt area 304 on the screen and switches to a floating window (or Thumbnail when hovering ball). Here, theprompt area 304 is the area occupied on the screen before thesecond window 302 is hidden.

可选地，在用户拖动分隔条303的过程中，第一窗口301中运行的第一应用可以被中断或暂停，也可以不被中断或暂停，本申请对此不作限定。Optionally, during the process of the user dragging theseparation bar 303, the first application running in thefirst window 301 may be interrupted or suspended, or may not be interrupted or suspended, which is not limited in this application.

在一些实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第三预设条件时，若用户停止触摸操作，则响应于该操作，电子设备可以将分隔条303停留在用户停止触摸操作的位置。换言之，用户通过拖动分隔条303的调节分屏比例大小。In some embodiments, when the electronic device detects that the position of theseparation bar 303 satisfies the third preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation, in response to the operation, the electronic device can keep theseparation bar 303 at the position where the user stops the touch operation. Location. In other words, the user adjusts the split screen ratio by dragging the dividingbar 303 .

本申请实施例中，分隔条303的位置所满足的第三预设条件可以有多种形式。In this embodiment of the present application, the third preset condition satisfied by the position of thepartition bar 303 may have various forms.

在一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：分隔条303所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值。In an example, the third preset condition includes: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is greater than a fifth threshold.

可选地，第五阈值大于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度，且，第五阈值小于或等于3/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the fifth threshold is greater than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width, and the fifth threshold is less than or equal to 3/8 of the screen width.

示例性的，第五阈值可以为上述范围中的定值，例如第五阈值取以下值中的任意一个：1/8个屏幕宽度、1/4个屏幕宽度、3/8个屏幕宽度、5/16个屏幕宽度等。Exemplarily, the fifth threshold may be a fixed value in the above range, for example, the fifth threshold may take any one of the following values: 1/8 screen width, 1/4 screen width, 3/8 screen width, 5 /16 screen widths, etc.

示例性的，第五阈值的范围可以进一步缩小，例如第五阈值大于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度，且，第五阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。例如，第五阈值大于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度，且，第五阈值小于或等于3/8个屏幕宽度。Exemplarily, the range of the fifth threshold may be further narrowed, for example, the fifth threshold is greater than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width, and the fifth threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width. For example, the fifth threshold is greater than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width, and the fifth threshold is less than or equal to 3/8 of the screen width.

应理解，上述屏幕宽度指的是屏幕在垂直分隔条的方向上的宽度。应理解，第五阈值不限于上述所列举的数值或范围，本领域技术人员可以根据电子设备屏幕的大小相应设计第三阈值大小。It should be understood that the above-mentioned screen width refers to the width of the screen in the direction of the vertical separation bar. It should be understood that the fifth threshold is not limited to the values or ranges listed above, and those skilled in the art can design the size of the third threshold according to the size of the screen of the electronic device.

在另一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：应用窗口在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度大于第六阈值。该示例中，第六阈值的取值可以参考上述示例中第五阈值的取值，在此不再赘述。In another example, the third preset condition includes: a width of the application window in a direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is greater than a sixth threshold. In this example, for the value of the sixth threshold, reference may be made to the value of the fifth threshold in the foregoing example, and details are not described herein again.

在另一个示例中，所述第三预设条件包括：分隔条303位于第三预设位置与分隔条的初始位置之间。其中分隔条303的位置、第三预设位置以及分隔条的初始位置可以用二维平面坐标表示(相应坐标取值可以根据坐标原点的位置相应确定)，根据分隔条303的坐标判断分隔条303的位置是否满足第三预设条件。对应于屏幕显示的多个应用窗口，第三预设位置可以有多个，不同的第三预设位置，其对应的第三预设坐标值不同。实际应用中，可以根据分屏方式例如上下分屏或左右分屏，确定使用分隔条303所在位置的横坐标或纵坐标。In another example, the third preset condition includes: theseparation bar 303 is located between the third preset position and the initial position of the separation bar. The position of the dividingbar 303 , the third preset position and the initial position of the dividing bar can be represented by two-dimensional plane coordinates (the corresponding coordinate value can be determined according to the position of the origin of the coordinates), and the dividingbar 303 is judged according to the coordinates of the dividingbar 303 Whether the position of satisfies the third preset condition. Corresponding to multiple application windows displayed on the screen, there may be multiple third preset positions, and different third preset positions have different third preset coordinate values. In practical applications, the abscissa or ordinate of the position where thepartition bar 303 is used may be determined according to the screen splitting method, such as upper and lower screen splitting or left and right splitting.

本申请实施例中，第三预设条件中的第五阈值大于或等于第一预设条件中的第一阈值。可选地，当第五阈值等于第一阈值时，若电子设备检测到分隔条与屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值(即第一阈值)时，将分隔条停留在用户停止触摸操作的位置，若电子设备检测到分隔条与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第五阈值(即第一阈值)时，将被挤压的应用窗口悬浮显示与其他应用窗口之上。本申请实施例中，第一窗口运行的第一应用和第二窗口运行的第二应用可以相同，也可以不同。当第一应用和第二应用相同时，第一窗口和第二窗口可以是分别独立运行应用和其分身应用，或者第一窗口和第二窗口独立运行一个应用的两个任务。第三预设条件中第六阈值与第一预设条件中第三阈值的关系类似，不再赘述。In this embodiment of the present application, the fifth threshold in the third preset condition is greater than or equal to the first threshold in the first preset condition. Optionally, when the fifth threshold is equal to the first threshold, if the electronic device detects that the distance between the separation bar and the edge of the screen is greater than the fifth threshold (that is, the first threshold), the separation bar stays at the position where the user stops the touch operation, If the electronic device detects that the distance between the separation bar and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the fifth threshold (ie, the first threshold), the squeezed application window is displayed in a floating manner on top of other application windows. In this embodiment of the present application, the first application running in the first window and the second application running in the second window may be the same or different. When the first application and the second application are the same, the first window and the second window may be independently running an application and its subsidiary application, or the first window and the second window may independently run two tasks of one application. The relationship between the sixth threshold in the third preset condition and the third threshold in the first preset condition is similar, and will not be repeated here.

图9示出了本申请实施例提供的另一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图。与图6所示的应用窗口显示方法不同的是，图9所示的应用窗口显示方法中，用户拖动分隔条的过程中，在不同区域内停止触摸操作可以得到不同的退出分屏效果。下面结合附图详细介绍。FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. Different from the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 , in the application window display method shown in FIG. 9 , when the user drags the divider bar, stopping the touch operation in different areas can obtain different exit split screen effects. The following describes in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.

如图9中的(a)所示，与图6中的(a)图类似，分屏界面300包括第一窗口301、第二窗口302和介于第一窗口301和第二窗口302之前的分隔条303。第一窗口301和第二窗口302均为分屏状态，两个窗口分别独立运行并显示各自的应用，其中第一窗口301运行并显示第一应用，第二窗口302运行并显示第二应用。As shown in (a) of FIG. 9 , similar to (a) of FIG. 6 , thesplit screen interface 300 includes afirst window 301 , asecond window 302 , and a window between thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 .Divider 303. Thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 are both in split-screen state, the two windows run independently and display their respective applications, wherein thefirst window 301 runs and displays the first application, and thesecond window 302 runs and displays the second application.

在一种情况下，当用户想要暂时退出分屏状态(即后续可能还有同时使用第一应用和第二应用的需求)时，用户可以执行如图9中的(b)所示的对分隔条303的拖动操作。当电子设备检测到用户触摸分隔条303时，响应于该操作，电子设备将分隔条303向需要退出分屏状态的应用窗口一侧移动，其中被挤压的应用窗口的宽度减小，被拉伸的应用窗口的宽度增加。当电子设备检测到用户停止触摸分隔条303时，若电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态(例如悬浮窗状态或悬浮球状态)，将被拉伸的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为全屏状态。被挤压的应用窗口悬浮显示于其他应用窗口之上。In one case, when the user wants to temporarily exit the split-screen state (that is, there may be a need to use the first application and the second application at the same time in the future), the user can perform the pairing shown in (b) of FIG. 9 . The drag operation of thedivider bar 303 . When the electronic device detects that the user touches thedivider bar 303, in response to the operation, the electronic device moves thedivider bar 303 to the side of the application window that needs to exit the split-screen state, wherein the squeezed application window has a reduced width and is pulled The width of the extended application window is increased. When the electronic device detects that the user stops touching thedivider bar 303, if the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device can switch the squeezed application window from the split-screen state to the floating state (for example, Floating window state or floating ball state), switch the stretched application window from split-screen state to full-screen state. The squeezed application window is displayed floating on top of other application windows.

示例性的，参考图9中的(b)所示，用户拖动分隔条303向第二窗口302一侧移动，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，若用户松开手指，参考图9中的(c)所示，电子设备将第一窗口301由分屏状态切换为全屏状态，将第二窗口302由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态(例如悬浮窗状态)。Exemplarily, as shown in (b) in FIG. 9 , the user drags thedivider bar 303 to move to the side of thesecond window 302. When the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, if the user Release your finger, as shown in (c) in FIG. 9 , the electronic device switches thefirst window 301 from the split-screen state to the full-screen state, and switches thesecond window 302 from the split-screen state to the floating state (for example, the floating window state) .

在另一种情况下，当用户想要完全退出分屏状态(即后续很长时间内不会有同时使用第一应用和第二应用的需求)时，用户可以执行如图9中的(d)所示的对分隔条303的拖动操作。当电子设备检测到用户触摸分隔条303时，响应于该操作，电子设备将分隔条303向需要退出分屏状态的应用窗口一侧移动，其中被挤压的应用窗口的宽度减小，被拉伸的应用窗口的宽度增加。当电子设备检测到用户停止触摸分隔条303时，若电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第二预设条件，参考图9中的(e)所示，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口例如第二窗口302关闭(相当于将其由分屏状态切换为全屏状态)，将被拉伸的应用窗口例如第一窗口301由分屏状态切换为全屏状态。被挤压的应用窗口所运行的应用可以在后台运行或应用进程被终止。In another case, when the user wants to completely exit the split-screen state (that is, there will be no need to use the first application and the second application at the same time for a long time), the user can execute (d) as shown in FIG. 9 . ) on thedivider bar 303. When the electronic device detects that the user touches thedivider bar 303, in response to the operation, the electronic device moves thedivider bar 303 to the side of the application window that needs to exit the split-screen state, wherein the squeezed application window has a reduced width and is pulled The width of the extended application window is increased. When the electronic device detects that the user stops touching theseparation bar 303, if the electronic device detects that the position of theseparation bar 303 satisfies the second preset condition, as shown in (e) of FIG. The window such as thesecond window 302 is closed (equivalent to switching it from the split screen state to the full screen state), and the stretched application window such as thefirst window 301 is switched from the split screen state to the full screen state. The app running in the squeezed app window can run in the background or the app process can be terminated.

本申请实施例中，分隔条303的位置所满足的第一预设条件和第二预设条件可以有多种形式。In this embodiment of the present application, the first preset condition and the second preset condition satisfied by the position of thepartition bar 303 may have various forms.

在一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值且大于第二阈值，第二阈值小于第一阈值。所述第二预设条件包括：分隔条303所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值。In one example, the first preset condition includes: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to a first threshold and greater than a second threshold, and the second threshold is less than the first threshold. The second preset condition includes: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the second threshold.

也就是说，当电子设备检测到分隔条303与屏幕边缘的距离属于第二阈值与第一阈值之间的范围时，在用户停止触摸后，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。当电子设备检测到分隔条303与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值时，在用户停止触摸后，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口关闭。That is to say, when the electronic device detects that the distance between theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen falls within the range between the second threshold and the first threshold, after the user stops touching, the electronic device switches the squeezed application window to a floating state . When the electronic device detects that the distance between theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the second threshold, the electronic device closes the squeezed application window after the user stops touching.

可选地，第一阈值大于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/4个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/4 of the screen width.

可选地，第一阈值大于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width.

可选地，第二阈值大于或等于0，且，第二阈值小于或等于1/8个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the second threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the second threshold is less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width.

可选地，第二阈值大于或等于0，且，第二阈值小于或等于1/16个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the second threshold is greater than or equal to 0, and the second threshold is less than or equal to 1/16 of the screen width.

应理解，上述屏幕边缘指的是屏幕上与分隔条平行的边缘。上述屏幕宽度指的是屏幕在垂直分隔条的方向上的宽度。应理解，上述数值范围仅为示例性说明，本领域技术人员可以根据实际需要例如屏幕大小、分屏窗口大小等相应确定第一阈值和第二阈值的大小。It should be understood that the above-mentioned screen edge refers to the edge on the screen that is parallel to the dividing bar. The above screen width refers to the width of the screen in the direction of the vertical divider. It should be understood that the above numerical ranges are only illustrative, and those skilled in the art can determine the size of the first threshold and the second threshold according to actual needs, such as the size of the screen, the size of the split-screen window, and the like.

在另一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：应用窗口在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第三阈值且大于第四阈值，第四阈值小于第三阈值。所述第二预设条件包括：应用窗口在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第四阈值。该示例中，第三阈值的取值可以参考上述示例中第一阈值的取值，第四阈值的取值可以参考上述示例中第二阈值的取值，在此不再赘述。In another example, the first preset condition includes: the width of the application window in a direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is less than or equal to a third threshold and greater than a fourth threshold, and the fourth threshold is less than the third threshold. The second preset condition includes: the width of the application window in the direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is less than or equal to the fourth threshold. In this example, the value of the third threshold may refer to the value of the first threshold in the above example, and the value of the fourth threshold may refer to the value of the second threshold in the above example, which will not be repeated here.

也即，当电子设备检测到应用窗口的宽度属于第四阈值与第三阈值之间的范围时，在用户停止触摸后，电子设备将该应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。当电子设备检测到应用窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值时，在用户停止触摸后，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口关闭。That is, when the electronic device detects that the width of the application window falls within the range between the fourth threshold and the third threshold, after the user stops touching, the electronic device switches the application window to a floating state. When the electronic device detects that the width of the application window is less than or equal to the fourth threshold, after the user stops touching, the electronic device closes the squeezed application window.

在另一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间。所述第二预设条件包括：分隔条303位于所述第二预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。其中第二预设位置位于第一预设位置与屏幕边缘之间。其中分隔条303的位置、第一预设位置、第二预设位置以及屏幕边缘位置可以用二维平面坐标表示，根据分隔条303的坐标判断分隔条303的位置是否满足第一预设条件，或者是否满足第二预设条件。对应于屏幕显示的多个应用窗口，第一预设位置可以有多个，不同的第一预设位置，其对应的第一预设坐标值不同。同理，第二预设位置可以有多个，不同的第二预设位置，其对应的第二预设坐标值不同。这里屏幕的坐标原点可以设置在屏幕的四角、四边、中心或其他位置，分隔条303的位置坐标取值、第一预设位置的坐标取值、第二预设位置的坐标取值根据坐标原点的位置相应确定。实际应用中，可以根据分屏方式例如上下分屏或左右分屏，确定使用分隔条303所在位置的横坐标或纵坐标。In another example, the first preset condition includes: thepartition bar 303 is located between the first preset position and the second preset position. The second preset condition includes: theseparation bar 303 is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device. The second preset position is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen. The position, the first preset position, the second preset position and the screen edge position of the dividingbar 303 can be represented by two-dimensional plane coordinates, and it is determined whether the position of the dividingbar 303 satisfies the first preset condition according to the coordinates of the dividingbar 303 , Or whether the second preset condition is met. Corresponding to multiple application windows displayed on the screen, there may be multiple first preset positions, and different first preset positions have different first preset coordinate values. Similarly, there may be multiple second preset positions, and different second preset positions correspond to different second preset coordinate values. Here, the coordinate origin of the screen can be set at the four corners, four sides, center or other positions of the screen. The position coordinates of theseparation bar 303, the coordinates of the first preset position, and the coordinates of the second preset position are based on the coordinate origin. position is determined accordingly. In practical applications, the abscissa or ordinate of the position where thepartition bar 303 is used may be determined according to the screen splitting method, such as upper and lower screen splitting or left and right splitting.

以图9中的(b)和(d)为例，设定电子设备屏幕的横向坐标为X坐标，电子设备屏幕的纵向坐标为Y坐标。以分屏界面300为左右分屏为例，当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值大于或等于第一预设坐标值(即第一预设位置的X坐标)A，且小于第二预设坐标值(即第二预设位置的X坐标)C时，在用户松开手指后，电子设备将X坐标值大于或等于第一预设坐标值A的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值大于或等于第二预设坐标值C时，在用户松开手指后，电子设备将X坐标值大于或等于第二预设坐标值C的应用窗口关闭。这里相当于用户对分屏界面上的右侧应用窗口进行操作。Taking (b) and (d) in FIG. 9 as an example, the horizontal coordinate of the electronic device screen is set as the X coordinate, and the vertical coordinate of the electronic device screen is set as the Y coordinate. Taking thesplit screen interface 300 as a left and right split screen as an example, when the electronic device detects that the X coordinate value of the position where thedivider bar 303 is located is greater than or equal to the first preset coordinate value (that is, the X coordinate of the first preset position) A, and less than When the second preset coordinate value (that is, the X coordinate of the second preset position) C, after the user releases the finger, the electronic device switches the application window whose X coordinate value is greater than or equal to the first preset coordinate value A to the floating state . When the electronic device detects that the X coordinate value of the position where theseparation bar 303 is located is greater than or equal to the second preset coordinate value C, after the user releases the finger, the electronic device will set the X coordinate value greater than or equal to the second preset coordinate value C The application window closes. This is equivalent to the user operating the right application window on the split-screen interface.

当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值小于或等于第一预设坐标值B，且大于第二预设坐标值D时，在用户松开手指后，电子设备将X坐标值小于或等于第一预设坐标值B的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。当电子设备检测到分隔条303所在位置的X坐标值小于或等于第二预设坐标值D时，在用户松开手指后，电子设备将X坐标值小于或等于第二预设坐标值D的应用窗口关闭。这里相当于用户对分屏界面上的右侧应用窗口进行操作。这里，第二预设坐标值D<第一预设坐标值B<第一预设坐标值A<第二预设坐标值C。类似地，在上下分屏情况下用户对分屏界面上的上方应用窗口或下方应用窗口进行操作时，电子设备的判断过程类似，具体可参考上文相关描述，在此不再赘述。When the electronic device detects that the X-coordinate value of the position where the dividingbar 303 is located is less than or equal to the first preset coordinate value B and greater than the second preset coordinate value D, after the user releases the finger, the electronic device sets the X-coordinate value smaller than or equal to the second preset coordinate value D. or the application window equal to the first preset coordinate value B is switched to the floating state. When the electronic device detects that the X coordinate value of the position where thepartition bar 303 is located is less than or equal to the second preset coordinate value D, after the user releases the finger, the electronic device will set the X coordinate value less than or equal to the second preset coordinate value D The application window closes. This is equivalent to the user operating the right application window on the split-screen interface. Here, the second preset coordinate value D<the first preset coordinate value B<the first preset coordinate value A<the second preset coordinate value C. Similarly, when the user operates the upper application window or the lower application window on the split screen interface in the case of the upper and lower screens, the electronic device's judgment process is similar. For details, please refer to the relevant description above, which will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例中，被挤压的应用窗口变成悬浮状态时的悬浮方式(可以切换为悬浮窗或悬浮球等)、当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时通过界面变化提示用户应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态的方式、用户拖动分隔条过程中应用窗口的显示方式等均与图6中的应用窗口显示方法类似，具体可参考上文描述，为简洁不再赘述。In this embodiment of the present application, when the squeezed application window becomes a floating state (it can be switched to a floating window or a floating ball, etc.), when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 meets the first preset condition, the The interface change prompts the user that the application window will be switched to a floating state, and the display method of the application window during the user dragging the divider bar is similar to the application window display method in Figure 6. For details, please refer to the above description. Repeat.

可选地，参考图9中的(b)、(d)所示，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备通过界面变化提示用户应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。如果用户没有停止触摸而继续拖动分隔条303，则当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第二预设条件时，电子设备还可以通过界面变化例如对缩略图模糊处理、在被挤压的应用窗口对应位置显示黑色幕布、或者将被挤压的应用窗口对应位置高亮等，振动反馈，以及文本框等至少一种方式提示用户在此处停止触摸的话，被挤压的应用窗口将被关闭。Optionally, as shown in (b) and (d) in FIG. 9 , when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device prompts the user that the application window will be switched to through the interface change. suspended state. If the user continues to drag thedivider bar 303 without stopping the touch, when the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 satisfies the second preset condition, the electronic device can also change the interface, such as blurring the thumbnails, or when being squeezed. If the corresponding position of the application window displays a black curtain, or the corresponding position of the squeezed application window is highlighted, etc., vibration feedback, and at least one method such as a text box prompts the user to stop touching here, the squeezed application window will be displayed. is closed.

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的的位置满足第三预设条件时，若用户停止触摸，则响应于该操作，电子设备可以将分隔条303停留在用户停止触摸的位置。第三预设条件的形式与图6中的应用窗口显示方法类似，具体可参考上文描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 meets the third preset condition, if the user stops touching, the electronic device can stop thedivider bar 303 at the position where the user stops touching in response to the operation. The form of the third preset condition is similar to that of the application window display method in FIG. 6 , for details, reference may be made to the above description, which will not be repeated here.

以上结合图6至图9介绍了在用户在拖动分隔条过程中，电子设备执行的操作和电子设备上的用户界面变化。下面将结合图10和图11描述在应用窗口被切换为悬浮状态时用户可以执行的操作和电子设备上的用户界面变化。The operations performed by the electronic device and the user interface changes on the electronic device when the user drags the divider bar are described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9 . The operations that the user can perform when the application window is switched to the floating state and the user interface changes on the electronic device will be described below with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 .

图10示出了电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮窗状态的图形用户界面示意图。参考图10中的(a)所示，第一窗口301处于全屏状态，其中运行的应用为第一应用；第二窗口302处于悬浮窗状态，其中运行的应用为第二应用。参考图10中的(a)所示的第二窗口302的放大图。处于悬浮窗状态的第二窗口302可以包括应用界面显示区310和工具栏320，其中应用界面显示区310用于显示第二应用的用户界面，工具栏320则用于用户对悬浮窗进行操作。FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface in which an electronic device switches a squeezed application window from a split-screen state to a floating window state. Referring to (a) in FIG. 10 , thefirst window 301 is in a full screen state, and the running application is the first application; thesecond window 302 is in the floating window state, and the running application is the second application. Refer to the enlarged view of thesecond window 302 shown in (a) of FIG. 10 . Thesecond window 302 in the floating window state may include an applicationinterface display area 310 and atoolbar 320, wherein the applicationinterface display area 310 is used to display the user interface of the second application, and thetoolbar 320 is used for the user to operate the floating window.

本申请实施例中，工具栏320包括窗口关闭控件321、窗口最小化控件322、分屏显示控件323、全屏显示控件324中的至少一个功能控件。In this embodiment of the present application, thetoolbar 320 includes at least one function control among awindow closing control 321 , awindow minimizing control 322 , a split-screen display control 323 , and a full-screen display control 324 .

可选地，当用户点击窗口关闭控件321时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302关闭，即，使第二窗口302所运行的第二应用保持后台运行或者终止第二窗口302所运行的第二应用的进程。这种情况下，如果用户再想同时使用第一应用和第二应用，用户可以在第一窗口301的基础上重新进行分屏操作。Optionally, when the user clicks thewindow closing control 321, in response to the operation, the electronic device can close thesecond window 302, that is, keep the second application running in thesecond window 302 running in the background or terminate thesecond window 302. The process of the second application that is running. In this case, if the user wants to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can perform the split-screen operation again on the basis of thefirst window 301 .

可选地，当用户点击分屏显示控件323时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由悬浮窗状态切换回分屏状态。具体地，电子设备可以将第二窗口302切换回用户执行退出分屏状态操作前第二窗口所处的分屏状态。例如当用户点击分屏显示控件323时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以显示如图6中的(a)或如图9中的(a)所示的分屏界面。Optionally, when the user clicks the split-screen display control 323, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the floating window state to the split-screen state. Specifically, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 back to the split-screen state that the second window was in before the user performed the operation of exiting the split-screen state. For example, when the user clicks the splitscreen display control 323, in response to the operation, the electronic device may display a split screen interface as shown in (a) in FIG. 6 or (a) in FIG. 9 .

可选地，当用户点击全屏显示控件324时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由悬浮窗状态切换到全屏状态。即，在屏幕上只显示第二窗口302。Optionally, when the user clicks on the full-screen display control 324, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the floating window state to the full-screen state. That is, only thesecond window 302 is displayed on the screen.

可选地，当用户点击窗口最小化控件322时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302的应用界面显示区310隐藏，即隐藏第二应用的用户界面。示例性的，如图10中的(b)所示，屏幕上只显示第二窗口的工具栏320。Optionally, when the user clicks thewindow minimization control 322, in response to the operation, the electronic device may hide the applicationinterface display area 310 of thesecond window 302, that is, hide the user interface of the second application. Exemplarily, as shown in (b) of FIG. 10 , only thetoolbar 320 of the second window is displayed on the screen.

参考图10中的(b)所示，与图10中的(a)不同的是，工具栏320中将窗口最小化控件322替换为展开控件325。当用户点击展开控件325时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302的应用界面显示区310(参见图10中的(a))展开。换句话说，当用户点击图10中的(a)所示的窗口最小化控件322后，电子设备显示如图10中的(b)所示的图形用户界面。当用户点击图10中的(b)所示的展开控件325后，电子设备显示如图10中的(a)所示的图形用户界面。Referring to (b) in FIG. 10 , what is different from (a) in FIG. 10 is that the window minimizecontrol 322 is replaced with an expandcontrol 325 in thetoolbar 320 . When the user clicks the expandcontrol 325, in response to the operation, the electronic device can expand the application interface display area 310 (see (a) in FIG. 10 ) of thesecond window 302 . In other words, when the user clicks thewindow minimization control 322 shown in (a) of FIG. 10 , the electronic device displays the graphical user interface shown in (b) of FIG. 10 . When the user clicks the expandcontrol 325 shown in (b) in FIG. 10 , the electronic device displays the graphical user interface shown in (a) in FIG. 10 .

在一些实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条满足第一预设条件时，在用户停止触摸后，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口(例如第二窗口302)切换为如图10中的(b)所示的悬浮状态的窗口。电子设备直接将悬浮窗中运行的应用的用户界面隐藏，用户无需对其进行进一步的操作，节省用户时间，提升用户体验。In some embodiments, when the electronic device detects that the divider bar meets the first preset condition, after the user stops touching, the electronic device can switch the squeezed application window (eg, the second window 302 ) to the one shown in FIG. 10 The window in the suspended state shown in (b). The electronic device directly hides the user interface of the application running in the floating window, and the user does not need to perform further operations on it, which saves the user's time and improves the user experience.

可选地，当用户点击窗口最小化控件322时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将处于悬浮窗状态的第二窗口302切换为悬浮球状态。例如，当用户点击窗口最小化控件322时，响应于该操作，电子设备将显示如图6中的(d)所示的界面。Optionally, when the user clicks thewindow minimization control 322, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 in the floating window state to the floating ball state. For example, when the user clicks the window minimizecontrol 322, in response to the operation, the electronic device will display an interface as shown in (d) of FIG. 6 .

本申请实施例中，悬浮窗中的工具栏320可以包括其他更多或更少的控件，本申请对此不作限定。在其他实施例中，工具栏320中的控件可以实现其他的功能，本申请对此也不作限定。In this embodiment of the present application, thetoolbar 320 in the floating window may include other more or less controls, which is not limited in the present application. In other embodiments, the controls in thetoolbar 320 may implement other functions, which are not limited in this application.

图11示出了电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮球状态的图形用户界面示意图。参考图11，第一窗口301处于全屏状态，其中运行的应用为第一应用；第二窗口302处于悬浮球例如悬浮图标状态，其中运行的应用为第二应用。FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface in which an electronic device switches a squeezed application window from a split-screen state to a floating ball state. Referring to FIG. 11 , thefirst window 301 is in a full screen state, and the running application is the first application; thesecond window 302 is in the state of a floating ball such as a floating icon, and the running application is the second application.

本申请实施例中，参考图11中(b)所示，悬浮球状态的第二窗口302可以位于第一窗口301上的预定位置，或者用户可以移动悬浮球到任意位置。参考图11中的(a)所示，悬浮球状态的第二窗口302也可以吸附于屏幕边缘的预定位置，或者用户可以移动悬浮球到屏幕边缘的任意位置。当然，在一些实施例中，在预设时间内电子设备没有检测到用户对悬浮球执行操作，则电子设备可以将悬浮球隐藏为悬浮条吸附于屏幕边缘。当电子设备检测到用户执行预设动作例如触摸屏幕边缘时，电子设备可以将悬浮条切换悬浮球显示。In this embodiment of the present application, as shown in FIG. 11( b ), thesecond window 302 in the floating ball state may be located at a predetermined position on thefirst window 301 , or the user may move the floating ball to any position. Referring to (a) of FIG. 11 , thesecond window 302 in the floating ball state can also be attached to a predetermined position on the edge of the screen, or the user can move the floating ball to any position on the edge of the screen. Of course, in some embodiments, if the electronic device does not detect that the user performs an operation on the levitation ball within a preset time, the electronic device can hide the levitation ball as a suspension bar to be adsorbed on the edge of the screen. When the electronic device detects that the user performs a preset action, such as touching the edge of the screen, the electronic device can switch the floating bar to display the floating ball.

可选地，当用户点击图11中的悬浮球(具体可以为悬浮图标)时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将悬浮球状态的第二窗口302切换为悬浮窗状态，例如电子设备可以显示如图10中(a)所示的用户界面，或者显示如图10中的(b)所示的用户界面。Optionally, when the user clicks the floating ball (specifically, a floating icon) in FIG. 11, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 in the floating ball state to the floating window state, for example, the electronic device can display The user interface shown in FIG. 10( a ), or the user interface shown in FIG. 10( b ) is displayed.

可选地，当用户点击图11中的悬浮球(具体可以为悬浮图标)时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由悬浮球状态切换为分屏状态，例如电子设备可以显示如图9中(a)所示的用户界面。Optionally, when the user clicks on the floating ball (specifically, a floating icon) in FIG. 11, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the floating ball state to the split-screen state, for example, the electronic device can display User interface as shown in Figure 9(a).

本申请实施例中，当应用窗口被切换为悬浮状态时，用户可以方便地对悬浮窗或悬浮球进行操作，并且能够在不中断当前应用任务的情况下，重新同时使用两个应用。In the embodiment of the present application, when the application window is switched to the floating state, the user can conveniently operate the floating window or the floating ball, and can re-use the two applications simultaneously without interrupting the current application task.

图12示出了本申请实施例提供的又一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图。与图6和图9所示的应用窗口显示方法不同的是，图12所示的应用窗口显示方法中，当电子设备检测到分隔条的位置满足第一预设条件时，被挤压的应用窗口不会退出分屏状态而是被锁定在屏幕边缘，被拉伸的应用窗口则接近于全屏。FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of another example of the method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. Different from the application window display methods shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 9 , in the application window display method shown in FIG. 12 , when the electronic device detects that the position of the divider meets the first preset condition, the squeezed application The window does not exit the split screen state but is locked at the edge of the screen, and the stretched application window is close to full screen.

参考图12中的(a)，用户执行图中所示的对分隔条303的拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备可以缩小第二窗口302的尺寸，增大第一窗口301的尺寸。示例性的，电子设备可以显示如图12中的(b)所示的界面。Referring to (a) in FIG. 12 , the user performs a drag operation on thedivider bar 303 shown in the figure, and in response to the operation, the electronic device can reduce the size of thesecond window 302 and increase the size of thefirst window 301 . Exemplarily, the electronic device may display an interface as shown in (b) of FIG. 12 .

当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，此时若用户停止触摸操作，分隔条303可以停在当前位置，或者自动移动到预设位置，其中预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的距离小于分隔条303与屏幕边缘之间的距离。这样，电子设备将第二窗口以预设宽度锁定于屏幕边缘。When the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, thedivider bar 303 can stop at the current position, or automatically move to a preset position, where the preset position is the same as the edge of the screen The distance therebetween is smaller than the distance between thedivider bar 303 and the edge of the screen. In this way, the electronic device locks the second window to the edge of the screen with a preset width.

本申请实施例中，第二窗口以预设宽度锁定在屏幕边缘，可以理解为第二窗口以预设宽度停靠、固定或吸附在屏幕边缘，第二窗口处于非激活状态。第二窗口对应的第二应用在后台运行，在分屏界面上不显示第二应用的用户界面，用户不能通过第二应用的用户界面与电子设备进行交互。处于锁定状态的第二窗口类似于一个功能控件，隐藏了第二应用的用户界面，用户不能与锁定状态的第二窗口交互。但在一些实施例中，用户可以对锁定状态的第二窗口执行长按、点击或拖动等操作，响应于上述操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口由非激活态切换为激活态，例如使第二窗口显示第二应用的用户界面等。In this embodiment of the present application, the second window is locked at the edge of the screen with a preset width, which can be understood as the second window is docked, fixed or adsorbed at the edge of the screen with a preset width, and the second window is in an inactive state. The second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background, the user interface of the second application is not displayed on the split screen interface, and the user cannot interact with the electronic device through the user interface of the second application. The second window in the locked state is similar to a function control, which hides the user interface of the second application, and the user cannot interact with the second window in the locked state. However, in some embodiments, the user may perform operations such as long pressing, clicking or dragging on the second window in the locked state, and in response to the above operations, the electronic device may switch the second window from the inactive state to the active state, for example, enabling The second window displays the user interface and the like of the second application.

本申请实施例中，所述预设宽度大于0且小于或等于屏幕宽度的1/8。在其他一些实施例中，预设宽度可以更小，例如小于屏幕的1/12，或者小于屏幕的1/24，或者预设宽度为几百个像素点等。本领域技术人员可以根据实际需要相应确定该预设宽度，在此不做具体限定。In this embodiment of the present application, the preset width is greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1/8 of the screen width. In some other embodiments, the preset width may be smaller, for example, smaller than 1/12 of the screen, or smaller than 1/24 of the screen, or the preset width is several hundred pixels, or the like. Those skilled in the art can correspondingly determine the preset width according to actual needs, which is not specifically limited here.

在一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值。该第一阈值可以根据实际需要相应确定。In an example, the first preset condition includes: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 303 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first threshold. The first threshold can be determined according to actual needs.

可选地，第一阈值大于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/16个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/16 of the screen width.

可选地，第一阈值大于0，且，第一阈值小于或等于1/32个屏幕宽度。Optionally, the first threshold is greater than 0, and the first threshold is less than or equal to 1/32 of the screen width.

在另一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：应用窗口在与分隔条303垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第三阈值。第三阈值的取值可以参考上述示例中第一阈值的取值，在此不再赘述。In another example, the first preset condition includes: a width of the application window in a direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 303 is less than or equal to a third threshold. For the value of the third threshold, reference may be made to the value of the first threshold in the foregoing example, and details are not described herein again.

在又一个示例中，所述第一预设条件包括：分隔条303位于第一预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。其中分隔条303的位置、第一预设位置以及屏幕边缘位置可以用二维平面坐标表示。该示例中第一预设条件与图6中的第一预设条件所包括的内容类似，具体内容可参考上文对图6的相关描述，为简洁，不再赘述。In yet another example, the first preset condition includes: theseparation bar 303 is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device. The position of the dividingbar 303, the first preset position and the screen edge position can be represented by two-dimensional plane coordinates. The first preset condition in this example is similar to the content included in the first preset condition in FIG. 6 . For specific content, reference may be made to the relevant description of FIG. 6 above, which will not be repeated for brevity.

参考图12中的(c)所示，当电子设备检测分隔条303满足第一预设条件时，电子设备将分隔条303固定于预设位置，第二窗口302则以预设宽度位于靠近屏幕边缘的部分。第二窗口302被锁定，或者说第二窗口302处于非激活状态，用户无法与第二窗口302显示的应用界面进行交互。本申请实施例中，当第二窗口302锁定于屏幕边缘时，第二窗口302的宽度远小于第一窗口301的宽度。因此第二窗口302占用了屏幕非常小的空间(如第二窗口302的屏幕宽度占比小于10％)，第一窗口301近似于全屏(如第一窗口301的屏幕宽度占比大于90％)，不影响用户使用第一窗口301运行的应用。Referring to (c) in FIG. 12 , when the electronic device detects that thedivider bar 303 meets the first preset condition, the electronic device fixes thedivider bar 303 at a preset position, and thesecond window 302 is located close to the screen with a preset width. part of the edge. Thesecond window 302 is locked, or in other words, thesecond window 302 is in an inactive state, and the user cannot interact with the application interface displayed on thesecond window 302 . In this embodiment of the present application, when thesecond window 302 is locked at the edge of the screen, the width of thesecond window 302 is much smaller than the width of thefirst window 301 . Therefore, thesecond window 302 occupies a very small space on the screen (for example, the screen width ratio of thesecond window 302 is less than 10%), and thefirst window 301 is approximately full screen (for example, the screen width ratio of thefirst window 301 is greater than 90%). , which does not affect the application run by the user using thefirst window 301 .

可选地，用户执行如图12中的(c)所示的对第二窗口302的点击操作，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由非激活态切换为分屏状态。例如电子设备可以将第二窗口302恢复到退出分屏操作执行之前的状态，示例性的可以显示如图12中的(e)所示的用户界面。Optionally, the user performs a click operation on thesecond window 302 as shown in (c) of FIG. 12 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the inactive state to the split-screen state. For example, the electronic device may restore thesecond window 302 to the state before the execution of the exiting the split-screen operation, and exemplarily may display the user interface shown in (e) of FIG. 12 .

可选地，用户执行如图12中的(d)所示的对分隔条303的拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由非激活态切换为分屏状态。例如电子设备可以将第二窗口302恢复到退出分屏操作执行之前的状态，示例性的可以显示如图12中的(e)所示的用户界面。Optionally, the user performs a drag operation on thepartition bar 303 as shown in (d) of FIG. 12 , and in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the inactive state to the split screen state. For example, the electronic device may restore thesecond window 302 to the state before the execution of the exiting the split-screen operation, and exemplarily may display the user interface shown in (e) of FIG. 12 .

可选地，与图9所示的应用窗口显示方法类似，本申请实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第二预设条件时，若此时用户结束触摸操作，电子设备可以将被锁定的应用窗口关闭(相当于将其由分屏状态切换为全屏状态)，电子设备退出分屏状态。Optionally, similar to the application window display method shown in FIG. 9 , in this embodiment of the present application, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the second preset condition, if the user ends the touch operation at this time, the electronic device The locked application window can be closed (equivalent to switching it from a split-screen state to a full-screen state), and the electronic device exits the split-screen state.

分隔条303的位置所满足的第二预设条件与图9所示的应用窗口显示方法类似，具体可参考图9中的相关描述，为简洁，不再赘述。The second preset condition satisfied by the position of thepartition bar 303 is similar to the application window display method shown in FIG. 9 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in FIG. 9 , which is not repeated for brevity.

本申请实施例中，被挤压的应用窗口占据的屏幕空间非常狭小，被拉伸的应用窗口近似全屏，因此本申请实施例中，第二预设条件可以包括：分隔条303的位置位于屏幕边缘。也就是说，当电子设备检测到分隔条303位于屏幕边缘时，可以将该被挤压的应用窗口关闭，使其显示的应用后台运行或者终止应用进程。In the embodiment of the present application, the screen space occupied by the squeezed application window is very small, and the stretched application window is approximately full screen. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the second preset condition may include: the position of thepartition bar 303 is located on the screen edge. That is, when the electronic device detects that thedivider bar 303 is located at the edge of the screen, the squeezed application window can be closed, so that the displayed application runs in the background or the application process is terminated.

可选地，与图6所示的应用窗口显示方法类似，本申请实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的的位置满足第三预设条件时，若用户手结束触摸操作，电子设备可以将分隔条303停留在用户结束触摸操作的位置。分隔条303的位置所满足的第二预设条件与图6所示的应用窗口显示方法类似，具体可参考图6中的相关描述，为简洁，不再赘述。Optionally, similar to the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 , in this embodiment of the present application, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the third preset condition, if the user ends the touch operation, the electronic device Thedivider bar 303 can be left at the position where the user ends the touch operation. The second preset condition satisfied by the position of thepartition bar 303 is similar to the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in FIG. 6 , which is not repeated for brevity.

本申请实施例中，电子设备的屏幕显示分屏界面，在用户拖动分隔条的过程中，用户在不同位置松手，电子设备对应执行不同的操作，例如调整分屏比例、切换应用窗口为悬浮状态、关闭应用窗口等。下面结合图13和图14描述分隔条的位置与电子设备执行的操作的对应关系，以期更好地理解本申请。In the embodiment of the present application, the screen of the electronic device displays a split-screen interface. During the process of dragging the divider bar, the user releases his hand at different positions, and the electronic device performs different operations correspondingly, such as adjusting the split-screen ratio, switching the application window to floating state, close the application window, etc. The following describes the correspondence between the positions of the dividing bars and the operations performed by the electronic device in conjunction with FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 , in order to better understand the present application.

图13示出了电子设备将应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态时分隔条的功能分区示意图。图13所示的分隔条的功能分区可以对应图6或图9所示的应用窗口显示方法。FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of the functional partition of the divider bar when the electronic device switches the application window from the split-screen state to the floating state. The functional divisions of the dividing bar shown in FIG. 13 may correspond to the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 9 .

如图13所示，电子设备的屏幕上包括第一窗口301和第二窗口302，第一窗口运行第一应用并显示第一应用界面，第二窗口302运行第二应用并显示第二应用界面。第一窗口301和第二窗口302分屏显示。如图13所示，初始状态下，分隔条位于屏幕中间位置，第一窗口301和第二窗口302的大小相同。应理解，本申请实施例仅以第一窗口301和第二窗口302左右分屏为例进行示例性说明，对于上下分屏的情况，本申请实施例提供的方法同样适用。As shown in FIG. 13 , the screen of the electronic device includes afirst window 301 and asecond window 302, the first window runs a first application and displays a first application interface, and thesecond window 302 runs a second application and displays a second application interface . Thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 are displayed on a split screen. As shown in FIG. 13 , in the initial state, the dividing bar is located in the middle of the screen, and the size of thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 are the same. It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application only take the left and right screen splitting of thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 as an example for illustrative description. For the case of upper and lower screen splitting, the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable.

如图所示，当分隔条位于初始位置与第三预设位置之间时，分隔条可以停留在该区域内的任意位置。若电子设备检测到用户拖动分隔条到该区域时停止触摸操作，则分隔条停留在用户结束触摸操作的位置。第三预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的距离为第五阈值c。因此对应地，当分隔条与屏幕边缘之间的距离大于第五阈值c时，用户拖动分隔条时，用户停止触摸操作的位置即为分隔条所在的位置。因此，本申请实施例中初始位置与第三预设位置之间的区域可以称为分屏大小调整区域。分隔条位于分屏大小调整区域时，对应于上述分隔条位置满足第三预设条件，电子设备执行调整分屏比例的操作。应理解，该分屏大小调整区域为可选设置，在一些实施例中也可以不设置该分屏大小调整区域，这样当用户拖动分隔条在初始位置与第一预设位置之间时松手，分隔条可以自动返回初始位置。As shown in the figure, when the dividing bar is located between the initial position and the third preset position, the dividing bar can stay at any position in the area. If the electronic device detects that the user stops the touch operation when dragging the divider bar to the area, the divider bar stays at the position where the user ends the touch operation. The distance between the third preset position and the edge of the screen is the fifth threshold value c. Accordingly, when the distance between the separation bar and the edge of the screen is greater than the fifth threshold c, when the user drags the separation bar, the position where the user stops the touch operation is the position of the separation bar. Therefore, the area between the initial position and the third preset position in this embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a split screen resizing area. When the divider bar is located in the split screen size adjustment area, corresponding to the position of the divider bar satisfying the third preset condition, the electronic device performs an operation of adjusting the split screen ratio. It should be understood that the split-screen resizing area is an optional setting, and in some embodiments, the split-screen resizing area may not be set, so that when the user drags the dividing bar between the initial position and the first preset position, let go , the divider can automatically return to its original position.

当分隔条位于第三预设位置与第一预设位置之间时，若用户拖动分隔条到该区域停止触摸操作，则分隔条停留在第三预设位置。第一预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的距离为第一阈值a。因此对应地，当分隔条与屏幕边缘之间的距离小于或等于第五阈值c且大于第一阈值a时，用户拖动分隔条时，用户停止触摸操作后分隔条将返回第三预设位置处。因此，本申请实施例中第三预设位置与第一预设位置之间的区域可以称为过渡区域。分隔条位于过渡区域时，电子设备执行维持分屏比例的操作。应理解，该过渡区域为可选设置，在一些实施例中，也可以不设置该过渡区，这样第五阈值c与第一阈值a可以采用相同的值。When the divider bar is located between the third preset position and the first preset position, if the user drags the divider bar to the area to stop the touch operation, the divider bar stays at the third preset position. The distance between the first preset position and the edge of the screen is the first threshold a. Therefore, correspondingly, when the distance between the divider bar and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the fifth threshold c and greater than the first threshold value a, when the user drags the divider bar, the divider bar will return to the third preset position after the user stops the touch operation place. Therefore, the area between the third preset position and the first preset position in the embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a transition area. When the divider is located in the transition area, the electronic device performs the operation of maintaining the split screen ratio. It should be understood that the transition area is an optional setting, and in some embodiments, the transition area may not be set, so that the fifth threshold value c and the first threshold value a may adopt the same value.

当分隔条位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间时，若用户拖动分隔条到该区域停止触摸操作，则分隔条隐藏，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口切换为悬浮状态。第二预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的距离为第二阈值b。因此对应地，当分隔条与屏幕边缘之间的距离小于或等于第一阈值a且大于第二阈值b时，用户拖动分隔条时，用户停止触摸操作后分隔条将隐藏，电子设备中的一个应用窗口为全屏状态，另一个应用窗口为悬浮状态。因此，本申请实施例中第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间的区域可以称为悬浮显示区域。分隔条位于悬浮显示区域时，对应于上述分隔条位置满足第一预设条件，电子设备执行切换应用窗口状态的操作。When the divider is located between the first preset position and the second preset position, if the user drags the divider to the area to stop the touch operation, the divider is hidden, and the electronic device switches the squeezed application window to a floating state . The distance between the second preset position and the edge of the screen is the second threshold b. Therefore, correspondingly, when the distance between the divider bar and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first threshold a and greater than the second threshold value b, when the user drags the divider bar, the divider bar will be hidden after the user stops the touch operation. One application window is in a full-screen state, and the other application window is in a floating state. Therefore, the area between the first preset position and the second preset position in the embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a floating display area. When the separation bar is located in the floating display area, corresponding to the position of the separation bar satisfying the first preset condition, the electronic device performs the operation of switching the application window state.

当分隔条位于第二预设位置与屏幕边缘之间时，若用户拖动分隔条到该区域停止触摸操作，则分隔条隐藏，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口关闭。因此对应地，当分隔条与屏幕边缘之间的距离小于或等于第二阈值b时，用户拖动分隔条时，用户停止触摸操作后分隔条将隐藏，电子设备中的一个应用窗口为全屏状态，另一个应用窗口被关闭。因此，本申请实施例中第二预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的区域可以称为退出分屏区域。分隔条位于退出分屏区域时，对应于上述分隔条位置满足第二预设条件，电子设备执行关闭应用窗口的操作。应理解，该退出分屏区域为可选设置，在一些实施例中，也可以不设置该退出分屏区域，例如图6所示的应用窗口显示方法。When the divider is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen, if the user drags the divider to the area to stop the touch operation, the divider is hidden, and the electronic device closes the squeezed application window. Therefore, correspondingly, when the distance between the divider bar and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the second threshold b, when the user drags the divider bar, the divider bar will be hidden after the user stops the touch operation, and an application window in the electronic device is in a full-screen state. , another application window is closed. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the area between the second preset position and the edge of the screen may be referred to as the exit split-screen area. When the partition bar is located in the exit split screen area, the electronic device performs an operation of closing the application window corresponding to the position of the partition bar satisfying the second preset condition. It should be understood that the exit split screen area is an optional setting, and in some embodiments, the exit split screen area may not be set, such as the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 .

本申请实施例中，第五阈值c≤第一阈值a<第二阈值b。In this embodiment of the present application, the fifth threshold c≤first threshold a<second threshold b.

需要说明的是，本申请实施例中，在分隔条的位置恰好对应第一阈值、第二阈值或第三阈值时，电子设备所执行的操作也可以根据实际需要进行设定。以分隔条与屏幕边缘的距离等于第二阈值b为例，电子设备执行的操作也可以不执行关闭应用窗口的操作，而是执行切换应用窗口状态的操作。其他情况与此类似，这里不再一一列举。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, when the position of the dividing bar just corresponds to the first threshold, the second threshold or the third threshold, the operation performed by the electronic device can also be set according to actual needs. Taking the distance between the separation bar and the edge of the screen equal to the second threshold b as an example, the operation performed by the electronic device may not perform the operation of closing the application window, but perform the operation of switching the state of the application window. Other situations are similar to this, and will not be listed here.

应理解，若电子设备通过应用窗口的宽度确定执行的操作，则图13中的第一阈值、第二阈值、第五阈值相应可以分别替换为上文所述的第三阈值、第四阈值、第六阈值。当应用窗口的宽度满足不同的预设条件时，电子设备执行不同的操作，具体参考图13中的相关描述，为简洁，在此不再赘述。It should be understood that if the electronic device determines the operation performed by the width of the application window, the first threshold, the second threshold, and the fifth threshold in FIG. 13 can be respectively replaced with the third threshold, fourth threshold, Sixth threshold. When the width of the application window satisfies different preset conditions, the electronic device performs different operations. For details, please refer to the relevant description in FIG. 13 , which is not repeated here for brevity.

图14示出了电子设备将应用窗口锁定在屏幕边缘时分隔条的功能分区示意图。图13所示的分隔条的功能分区可以对应图12所示的应用窗口显示方法。图14所示的分隔条的功能分区与图13类似，在此仅说明不同之处，其他可参考图13中的相关描述，为简洁，在此不再赘述。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the functional division of the divider bar when the electronic device locks the application window at the edge of the screen. The functional divisions of the dividing bar shown in FIG. 13 may correspond to the application window display method shown in FIG. 12 . The functional divisions of the partition bars shown in FIG. 14 are similar to those shown in FIG. 13 , and only the differences are described here. Others can refer to the related descriptions in FIG. 13 , which are not repeated here for brevity.

与图13不同的是，当分隔条位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间时，若用户拖动分隔条到该区域停止触摸操作，则分隔条将位于第二预设位置，电子设备将被挤压的应用窗口锁定在靠近屏幕边缘的狭小区域。第二预设位置与屏幕边缘之间的距离为第二阈值b。因此对应地，当分隔条与屏幕边缘之间的距离小于或等于第一阈值a且大于第二阈值b时，用户拖动分隔条时，用户松手后分隔条将位于第二预设位置，电子设备中的一个应用窗口为接近全屏显示，一个应用窗口被锁定，用户无法进行界面交互。因此，本申请实施例中第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间的区域可以称为锁定区域。分隔条位于锁定区域时，对应于图12中分隔条位置满足第二预设条件，电子设备执行锁定应用窗口的操作。The difference from FIG. 13 is that when the divider is located between the first preset position and the second preset position, if the user drags the divider to this area to stop the touch operation, the divider will be located at the second preset position, Electronic devices lock squashed application windows in small areas near the edges of the screen. The distance between the second preset position and the edge of the screen is the second threshold b. Therefore, correspondingly, when the distance between the divider bar and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first threshold a and greater than the second threshold value b, when the user drags the divider bar, the divider bar will be located at the second preset position after the user lets go, and the electronic An application window in the device is displayed in a near-full screen, an application window is locked, and the user cannot interact with the interface. Therefore, the area between the first preset position and the second preset position in this embodiment of the present application may be referred to as a locked area. When the partition bar is located in the locked area, corresponding to the position of the partition bar in FIG. 12 meeting the second preset condition, the electronic device performs the operation of locking the application window.

与图13中类似，本申请实施例中退出分屏区域为可选设置，这样当分隔条位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间时，若用户拖动分隔条到该区域停止触摸操作，则分隔条位于预设位置，被挤压的应用窗口已预设宽度锁定在靠近屏幕边缘的位置。Similar to FIG. 13 , in this embodiment of the present application, exiting the split screen area is an optional setting, so that when the divider is located between the first preset position and the second preset position, if the user drags the divider to this area to stop Touch operation, the divider bar is at a preset position, and the squeezed application window has a preset width and is locked at a position close to the edge of the screen.

此外，与图13不同之处还有，由于图13所对应的应用窗口显示方法中将应用窗口锁定在屏幕边缘，占用的空间很小，因此图14所示的第二阈值b可以比图13所示的第二阈值b设置更小的值。In addition, the difference from FIG. 13 is that, in the application window display method corresponding to FIG. 13 , the application window is locked at the edge of the screen and occupies very little space, so the second threshold b shown in FIG. The second threshold value b shown sets a smaller value.

以上实施例仅以将屏幕分为两个分屏为例进行的说明，本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法还可以应用于分屏个数为3个、4个或者更多个，下面结合附图作一些简要说明。The above embodiments are only described by taking the screen divided into two split screens as an example. The application window display method provided by the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to three, four or more split screens. The following combination The attached drawings provide some brief explanations.

图15示出了本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图。如图15所示，分屏界面包括第一窗口410、第二窗口420和第三窗口430，第一窗口410和第二窗口420之间设置分隔条401，第二窗口420与第三窗口430之间设置分隔条402。分隔条401和分隔条402可用于调节分屏比例。分屏默认状态下，第一窗口410和第二窗口420各占四分之一屏，第三窗口430占二分之一屏。因此，分隔条402也是第一窗口410与第三窗口430之间的分隔条。第一窗口410运行并显示第一应用(例如图中的视频应用)，第二窗口420运行并显示第二应用(例如图中的购物应用)，第三窗口430运行并显示第三应用(例如图中的聊天应用)。每个应用窗口独立运行各自的应用。FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 15 , the split screen interface includes afirst window 410 , asecond window 420 and athird window 430 , aseparation bar 401 is set between thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 , and thesecond window 420 and the third window 430 Adivider bar 402 is provided therebetween. Thedivider bar 401 and thedivider bar 402 can be used to adjust the split screen ratio. In the split screen default state, thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 each occupy a quarter of the screen, and thethird window 430 occupies a half of the screen. Therefore, thedivider bar 402 is also a divider bar between thefirst window 410 and thethird window 430 . Thefirst window 410 runs and displays a first application (eg, the video application in the figure), thesecond window 420 runs and displays a second application (eg, the shopping application in the figure), and thethird window 430 runs and displays a third application (eg, the shopping application in the figure). chat application in the picture). Each application window runs its own application independently.

当用户想要将某个应用或某些应用暂时退出分屏状态时，用户可以拖动该应用附近的分隔条向该应用窗口移动，应用本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法，可以将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态或者锁定在屏幕边缘。When the user wants to temporarily exit an application or some applications from the split-screen state, the user can drag the separation bar near the application to move toward the application window, and the application window display method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be applied to The squeezed application window is switched from a split-screen state to a floating state or locked at the edge of the screen.

在一个示例中，用户可以对其中一个应用窗口(例如四分之一屏的应用窗口或二分之一屏的应用窗口)操作。示例性，参考图15中的(b)，用户执行图中所示的对分隔条401的拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备缩小第二窗口420的尺寸，增大第一窗口410的尺寸。由于分隔条402的位置没有变化，因此第三窗口430的大小可以不变。当电子设备检测到分隔条401的位置满足第一预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸操作，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口(例如第二窗口420)由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。第一预设条件的设定与图6中所述的应用窗口显示方法中相关内容类似，即第一预设条件包括以下任一种：分隔条401所在位置与屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值；或者应用窗口在与分隔条401垂直的方向上的宽度小于或等于第三阈值；或者分隔条401位于第一预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。换句话说，本申请实施例第二窗口420类似于图6中的第二窗口302，第一窗口410类似于图6中的一窗口301。在对第二窗口420操作过程中，响应于用户操作，第一窗口410和第二窗口420的变化过程与图6中第一窗口301和第二窗口302的变化过程类似，具体可参考图6中的相关描述，在此不再赘述。In one example, the user may operate on one of the application windows (eg, a quarter-screen application window or a half-screen application window). Exemplarily, referring to (b) in FIG. 15 , the user performs a drag operation on thedivider bar 401 shown in the figure, and in response to the operation, the electronic device reduces the size of thesecond window 420 and increases the size of thefirst window 410 . size. Since the position of the dividingbar 402 does not change, the size of thethird window 430 may not change. When the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 401 satisfies the first preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, the electronic device can switch the squeezed application window (eg, the second window 420 ) from the split-screen state to the floating state state. The setting of the first preset condition is similar to the related content in the application window display method described in FIG. 6 , that is, the first preset condition includes any one of the following: the distance between the position of theseparation bar 401 and the edge of the screen is less than or equal to the first preset condition. a threshold; or the width of the application window in a direction perpendicular to the dividingbar 401 is less than or equal to a third threshold; or the dividingbar 401 is located between the first preset position and the screen edge of the electronic device. In other words, thesecond window 420 in this embodiment of the present application is similar to thesecond window 302 in FIG. 6 , and thefirst window 410 is similar to thefirst window 301 in FIG. 6 . During the operation on thesecond window 420, in response to the user's operation, the change process of thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 is similar to the change process of thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 in FIG. 6 , for details, please refer to FIG. 6 The relevant descriptions in , will not be repeated here.

本申请实施例以被挤压的应用窗口被切换为悬浮球状态为例，但应理解，本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法同样适用于被挤压的应用窗口被切换为悬浮窗状态和应用窗口被锁定在屏幕边缘的情况。The embodiment of the present application uses an example where a squeezed application window is switched to the floating ball state, but it should be understood that the application window display method provided in the embodiment of the present application is also applicable to the squashed application window being switched to the floating window state and the A situation where the application window is locked at the edge of the screen.

可选地，电子设备在第二窗口420的对应位置上显示第二应用的悬浮图标缩略图。具体可参考图6的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, the electronic device displays the thumbnail of the floating icon of the second application on the corresponding position of thesecond window 420 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description of FIG. 6 , which will not be repeated here.

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条401的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以通过振动反馈、文字提示和界面变化中的至少一种方式提示用户被挤压的应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thedivider bar 401 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may prompt the user that the squeezed application window will be removed by at least one of vibration feedback, text prompts and interface changes. Switch to floating state.

参考图15中的(c)所示，第二窗口420被切换为悬浮球状态后，第二窗口420对应的悬浮图标显示于第一窗口410和第三窗口430之上。其中第一窗口410和第三窗口430可以各占二分之一屏幕。Referring to (c) of FIG. 15 , after thesecond window 420 is switched to the floating ball state, the floating icon corresponding to thesecond window 420 is displayed on thefirst window 410 and thethird window 430 . Thefirst window 410 and thethird window 430 may each occupy one-half of the screen.

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条401的位置满足第二预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口420关闭。这里第二窗口420类似于图9中的第二窗口302，第一窗口410类似于图9中的一窗口301。在对第二窗口420操作过程中，响应于用户操作，第一窗口410和第二窗口420的变化过程与图9中第一窗口301和第二窗口302的变化过程类似，具体可参考图9的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 401 satisfies the second preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, the electronic device may close thesecond window 420 . Here, thesecond window 420 is similar to thesecond window 302 in FIG. 9 , and thefirst window 410 is similar to the onewindow 301 in FIG. 9 . In the process of operating thesecond window 420, in response to the user's operation, the changing process of thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 is similar to the changing process of thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 in FIG. 9 , please refer to FIG. 9 for details. The related descriptions are not repeated here.

仍参考图15中的(c)，用户还可以继续对剩下的应用窗口410和430继续操作，通过拖动分隔条402来调整分屏比例、将其中一个应用窗口切换由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态、将其中一个应用窗口关闭等。本申请实施例中可以将图6或图9所示的应用窗口显示方法应用于对应用窗口410和430的操作中，具体参考上文描述。Still referring to (c) in FIG. 15 , the user can continue to operate on the remainingapplication windows 410 and 430 , adjust the split-screen ratio by dragging thedivider bar 402 , and switch one of the application windows from the split-screen state to Floating state, closing one of the application windows, etc. In this embodiment of the present application, the application window display method shown in FIG. 6 or FIG. 9 may be applied to the operations on theapplication windows 410 and 430 , and specific reference is made to the above description.

在另一个示例中，用户也可以对其中两个应用窗口(例如两个四分之一屏的应用窗口)操作。示例性的，参考图15中的(d)，用户执行图中所示的对分隔条402的拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备同步缩小第一窗口410和第二窗口420的尺寸，增大第三窗口430的尺寸。当电子设备检测到分隔条402的位置满足第一预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口(例如第一窗口410和第二窗口420)由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。In another example, the user may also operate on two of the application windows (eg, two quarter-screen application windows). Exemplarily, referring to (d) in FIG. 15 , the user performs the drag operation on thedivider bar 402 shown in the figure, and in response to the operation, the electronic device synchronously reduces the size of thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420, The size of thethird window 430 is increased. When the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 402 satisfies the first preset condition, and if the user stops touching at this time, the electronic device can remove the squeezed application windows (eg, thefirst window 410 and the second window 420 ) from the split screen. The state is switched to the floating state.

可选地，电子设备在第一窗口410和第二窗口420的对应位置上显示第一应用和第二应用的悬浮图标缩略图。Optionally, the electronic device displays the floating icon thumbnails of the first application and the second application on corresponding positions of thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 .

参考图15中的(e)所示，第一窗口410和第二窗口420被切换为悬浮球状态后，第一窗口410和第二窗口420对应的悬浮图标显示于第三窗口430之上。电子设备将第三窗口430由分屏状态切换为全屏状态。Referring to (e) of FIG. 15 , after thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 are switched to the floating ball state, the floating icons corresponding to thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 are displayed on thethird window 430 . The electronic device switches thethird window 430 from a split-screen state to a full-screen state.

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条402的位置满足第二预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸，电子设备可以将第一窗口410和第二窗口420关闭。具体可参考图9的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 402 satisfies the second preset condition, if the user stops touching at this time, the electronic device may close thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 . For details, reference may be made to the related description of FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中，当电子设备检测到分隔条的位置满足第三预设条件时，若用户停止触摸操作，则响应于该操作，电子设备可以将分隔条停留在用户停止触摸操作的位置。In some embodiments, when the electronic device detects that the position of the divider bar meets the third preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation, in response to the operation, the electronic device can stop the divider bar at the position where the user stops the touch operation.

可选地，用户还可以对切换为悬浮状态的应用窗口操作，例如将应用窗口由悬浮状态切换为分屏状态，或者将应用窗口由悬浮球状态切换为悬浮窗状态等，具体操作方式与上文所述类似，具体参考图6至图12中的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, the user can also operate the application window that is switched to the floating state, such as switching the application window from the floating state to the split-screen state, or switching the application window from the floating ball state to the floating window state, etc. The specific operation method is the same as above. Similar to the description in the text, specific reference is made to the relevant descriptions in FIG. 6 to FIG. 12 , and details are not repeated here.

图16示出了本申请实施例提供的一例应用窗口显示方法的图形用户界面示意图。如图16所示，分屏界面包括第一窗口410、第二窗口420、第三窗口430和第四窗口440。第一窗口410和第二窗口420之间设置分隔条401，第二窗口420与第三窗口430之间设置分隔条402，第三窗口430与第四窗口440之间设置分隔条403，第四窗口440与第一窗口410之间设置分隔条404。分隔条401至404可用于调节分屏比例。分屏默认状态下，第一窗口410、第二窗口420、第三窗口430和第四窗口440各占四分之一屏。第一窗口410运行并显示第一应用(例如图中的视频应用)，第二窗口420运行并显示第二应用(例如图中的购物应用)，第三窗口430运行并显示第三应用(例如图中的聊天应用)，第四窗口440运行并显示第四应用(例如图中的信息应用)。每个应用窗口独立运行各自应用。FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a graphical user interface of an example of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 16 , the split screen interface includes afirst window 410 , asecond window 420 , athird window 430 and afourth window 440 . Aseparation bar 401 is arranged between thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420, aseparation bar 402 is arranged between thesecond window 420 and thethird window 430, aseparation bar 403 is arranged between thethird window 430 and thefourth window 440, and the fourthA dividing bar 404 is provided between thewindow 440 and thefirst window 410 . The divider bars 401 to 404 can be used to adjust the split screen ratio. In the split screen default state, thefirst window 410, thesecond window 420, thethird window 430 and thefourth window 440 each occupy a quarter of the screen. Thefirst window 410 runs and displays a first application (eg, the video application in the figure), thesecond window 420 runs and displays a second application (eg, the shopping application in the figure), and thethird window 430 runs and displays a third application (eg, the shopping application in the figure). The chat application in the figure), thefourth window 440 runs and displays a fourth application (eg, the information application in the figure). Each application window runs its own application independently.

当用户想要将某个或某些应用暂时退出分屏状态时，用户可以拖动该应用附近的分隔条向该应用窗口移动，应用本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法，可以将被挤压的应用窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态或者锁定在屏幕边缘。When the user wants to temporarily exit a certain application or some applications from the split-screen state, the user can drag the separation bar near the application to move toward the application window, and by applying the application window display method provided by this embodiment of the present application, the squeezed The pressed application window is switched from a split-screen state to a floating state or locked at the edge of the screen.

作为一个示例性，用户可以对其中一个应用窗口操作。示例性，参考图16中的(b)，用户执行图中所示的对分隔条403的拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备缩小第四窗口440的尺寸，增大第三窗口430的尺寸。由于分隔条401、402和404的位置没有变化，因此第一窗口410和第二窗口420的大小可以不变。当电子设备检测到分隔条403的位置满足第一预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸操作，电子设备可以将被挤压的应用窗口(例如第四窗口440)由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。具体可参考图6中的相关描述，在此不再赘述。As an example, the user may operate on one of the application windows. Exemplarily, referring to (b) in FIG. 16 , the user performs a drag operation on thedivider bar 403 shown in the figure, and in response to the operation, the electronic device reduces the size of thefourth window 440 and increases the size of thethird window 430 . size. Since the positions of the partition bars 401, 402 and 404 do not change, the sizes of thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 may not change. When the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 403 satisfies the first preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, the electronic device can switch the squeezed application window (for example, the fourth window 440 ) from the split-screen state to the floating state state. For details, reference may be made to the related description in FIG. 6 , which will not be repeated here.

可选地，电子设备在第四窗口440的对应位置上显示第四应用的悬浮图标缩略图。Optionally, the electronic device displays the thumbnail of the hover icon of the fourth application on the corresponding position of thefourth window 440 .

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条403的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以通过振动反馈、文字提示和界面变化中的至少一种方式提示用户被挤压的应用窗口将被切换为悬浮状态。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 403 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device may prompt the user that the squeezed application window will be deleted by at least one of vibration feedback, text prompts and interface changes. Switch to floating state.

参考图16中的(c)所示，第四窗口440被切换为悬浮球状态后，第四窗口440对应的悬浮图标显示于第一窗口410、第二窗口420和第三窗口430之上。其中第一窗口410和第二窗口420各占四分之一屏幕，第三窗口430占二分之一屏幕。Referring to (c) of FIG. 16 , after thefourth window 440 is switched to the floating ball state, the floating icon corresponding to thefourth window 440 is displayed on thefirst window 410 , thesecond window 420 and thethird window 430 . Thefirst window 410 and thesecond window 420 each occupy a quarter of the screen, and thethird window 430 occupies a half of the screen.

可选地，当电子设备检测到分隔条403位置满足第二预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸操作，电子设备可以将第四窗口440关闭。具体可参考图9的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 403 satisfies the second preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, the electronic device can close thefourth window 440 . For details, reference may be made to the related description of FIG. 9 , which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中，若分隔条401和403为一体分隔条，若分隔条402和404为一体分隔条，则每个分隔条用于分隔两侧的应用窗口。用户可以通过拖动一体分隔条，同时使一侧的两个应用窗口尺寸减少，使另一侧的两个应用窗口尺寸增大。相应地，当电子设备检测到一体分隔条的位置满足第一预设条件时，若此时用户停止触摸操作，电子设备可以将被挤压的两个应用窗口(例如第四窗口440和第一窗口410)由分屏状态切换为悬浮状态。In some embodiments, if the partition bars 401 and 403 are integrated as one, and if the partition bars 402 and 404 are integrated as one, each partition is used to separate the application windows on both sides. The user can drag the integrated dividing bar to reduce the size of the two application windows on one side and increase the size of the two application windows on the other side at the same time. Correspondingly, when the electronic device detects that the position of the integrated partition bar satisfies the first preset condition, if the user stops the touch operation at this time, the electronic device can place the squeezed two application windows (for example, thefourth window 440 and the first The window 410) is switched from the split screen state to the floating state.

可选地，用户还可以对剩下的处于分屏状态的应用窗口进行操作，其相当于对三分屏的应用窗口或者二分屏的应用窗口进行操作，具体地，可参考图15以及图6至图12的相关描述，在此不再赘述。Optionally, the user can also operate the remaining application windows in the split-screen state, which is equivalent to operating the application window of the three-screen split screen or the application window of the two-screen split screen. Specifically, refer to FIG. 15 and FIG. The relevant descriptions from 6 to FIG. 12 are not repeated here.

应理解，图15和图16仅示例性的描述本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法还可以应用于三分屏、四分屏或者更多分屏情况下。为描述简洁，这里主要描述了与二分屏的差异之处，其余未详尽描述的部分可参考前述二分屏的实施例。It should be understood that FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 only exemplarily describe the application window display method provided by the embodiments of the present application, and may also be applied to three-split screen, four-split screen, or more split-screen situations. For the sake of brevity, the differences from the two-split screen are mainly described here, and for the remaining parts that are not described in detail, reference may be made to the foregoing two-split screen embodiments.

结合上述实施例及相关附图，本申请实施例提供了一种应用窗口显示方法，该方法可以在如图1、图2所示的具有显示功能的电子设备(例如手机、平板电脑等)中实现。图17是本申请实施例提供的一种应用窗口显示方法的示意性流程图，如图17所示，该方法500可以包括如下步骤501至步骤505。With reference to the above embodiments and related drawings, the embodiments of the present application provide a method for displaying an application window, which can be used in an electronic device (such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, etc.) with a display function as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 . accomplish. FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a method for displaying an application window provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17 , themethod 500 may include the followingsteps 501 to 505 .

501，显示分屏界面，该分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔该第一窗口和该第二窗口的第一控件，该第一窗口运行第一应用，该第二窗口运行第二应用。501. Display a split screen interface, where the split screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a first control for separating the first window and the second window, the first window runs a first application, and the second window Run the second application.

一个实施例中，当第一应用和第二应用相同时，第一窗口和第二窗口可以运行同一个应用的不同任务，这样第一窗口和第二窗口为同一应用的两个任务窗口。例如用户可以在第一窗口使用某聊天应用与好友发送消息，在第二窗口查看该聊天应用内的新闻。In one embodiment, when the first application and the second application are the same, the first window and the second window can run different tasks of the same application, so that the first window and the second window are two task windows of the same application. For example, the user can use a chat application to send messages to friends in the first window, and view the news in the chat application in the second window.

示例性的，如图6至图12中，第一控件为分隔条303；如图15至图16中，第一控件为分隔条401、402、403、404。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 12 , the first control is theseparation bar 303 ; as shown in FIG. 15 to FIG. 16 , the first control is theseparation bar 401 , 402 , 403 , and 404 .

本申请实施例中第一控件用于分隔第一窗口和第二窗口，这里第一窗口和第二窗口相邻，第一控件位于第一窗口与第二窗口之间。In this embodiment of the present application, the first control is used to separate the first window and the second window, where the first window and the second window are adjacent, and the first control is located between the first window and the second window.

示例性的，如图6至图12，第一控件为条形。第一控件中间位置包括按键，当用户对该按键执行操作时，响应于用户操作，第一控件被激活，电子设备可以允许用户对该第一控件进行拖拽。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 12 , the first control is a bar. The middle position of the first control includes a button. When the user performs an operation on the button, the first control is activated in response to the user's operation, and the electronic device may allow the user to drag the first control.

502，检测到用户对该第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作。502. Detect a first operation of the user on the first control, where the first operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window.

示例性的，如图6至图12中，该第一操作可以为对该第一控件的拖动操作。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6 to FIG. 12 , the first operation may be a drag operation of the first control.

可选地，在执行检测第一操作之前，电子设备可以激活第一控件。例如用户触摸或长按第一控件，响应于该操作，电子设备激活第一控件。Optionally, before performing the detection of the first operation, the electronic device may activate the first control. For example, the user touches or long presses the first control, and in response to the operation, the electronic device activates the first control.

503，响应于该第一操作，将该第一控件向该第二窗口一侧移动，其中，该第二窗口的宽度减小，该第一窗口的宽度增大。503. In response to the first operation, move the first control to a side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases and the width of the first window increases.

示例性的，如图6中的(b)、图8中的(c)所示，当用户触摸分隔条303时，电子设备将分隔条303向第二窗口302一侧移动。第二窗口302被挤压，其尺寸减小，具体地第二窗口302在垂直于分隔条的方向上的宽度减少。第一窗口301被拉伸，其尺寸增大，具体地第一窗口301在垂直于分隔条的方向上的宽度增加。Exemplarily, as shown in (b) of FIG. 6 and (c) of FIG. 8 , when the user touches theseparation bar 303 , the electronic device moves theseparation bar 303 to the side of thesecond window 302 . Thesecond window 302 is squeezed, and its size is reduced, specifically, the width of thesecond window 302 in a direction perpendicular to the dividing bar is reduced. Thefirst window 301 is stretched and its size is increased, specifically, the width of thefirst window 301 in a direction perpendicular to the dividing bar is increased.

本申请实施例中，用户想要将哪个应用窗口退出分屏状态，就将第一控件向哪个应用窗口一侧移动。In this embodiment of the present application, the user moves the first control to the side of the application window that the user wants to exit from the split-screen state.

504，检测到用户结束所述第一操作。505，响应于该第一操作，若该第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将该第二窗口以悬浮窗或悬浮图标状态悬浮显示于该第一窗口之上。504. It is detected that the user ends the first operation. 505. In response to the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, display the first window in full screen, and display the second window in a floating window or a floating icon state on the first window. above the window.

一个示例中，该第一预设条件包括：该第一控件与电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值。In one example, the first preset condition includes: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a first threshold.

一个示例中，该第一预设条件包括：该第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值。In an example, the first preset condition includes: the width of the second window is less than or equal to a third threshold.

一个示例中，该第一预设条件包括：该第一控件位于第一预设位置与电子设备的屏幕边缘之间。In one example, the first preset condition includes: the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device.

本申请实施例中电子设备可以通过获取第一控件的坐标值、第一预设位置的坐标值、电子设备屏幕边缘的坐标值，计算第一控件与电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离、第二窗口的宽度、第一控件的位置范围等。具体可参考图6中的相关描述。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can calculate the distance between the first control and the screen edge of the electronic device, and the second window by acquiring the coordinate value of the first control, the coordinate value of the first preset position, and the coordinate value of the screen edge of the electronic device. width, the position range of the first control, etc. For details, refer to the related description in FIG. 6 .

一个实例中，方法500还包括：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭。In one example, themethod 500 further includes: detecting a second operation of the user; displaying the split screen interface in response to the second operation; detecting a third operation of the user on the first control, the third The operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is reduced, The width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; in response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the second preset condition, the first window is Full-screen display, and the second window is closed.

本申请实施例中，第三操作可以第一操作相同。类似地，在检测第三操作之前，该电子设备激活所述第一控件。例如电子设备检测到用户对所述第一控件的长按操作，激活所述第一控件。当第一控件处于激活状态时，第一控件可以在用户的触摸操作下移动。In this embodiment of the present application, the third operation may be the same as the first operation. Similarly, before detecting the third operation, the electronic device activates the first control. For example, the electronic device detects a user's long-press operation on the first control, and activates the first control. When the first control is in an activated state, the first control can be moved under a user's touch operation.

一个示例中，该第二预设条件包括该第一控件与该电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第二阈值，该第一预设条件包括该第一控件与该电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离小于或等于第一阈值且大于第二阈值。In one example, the second preset condition includes that the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is less than or equal to a second threshold, and the first preset condition includes the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device. The distance is less than or equal to the first threshold and greater than the second threshold.

一个示例中，该第二预设条件包括该第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第四阈值，该第一预设条件包括该第二窗口的宽度小于或等于第三阈值且大于第四阈值。In one example, the second preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to a fourth threshold, and the first preset condition includes that the width of the second window is less than or equal to the third threshold and greater than the fourth threshold.

一个示例中，该第二预设条件包括该第一控件位于该第二预设位置与该电子设备的屏幕边缘之间，该第一预设条件包括该第一控件位于第一预设位置与第二预设位置之间，其中该第二预设位置位于该第一预设位置与该屏幕边缘之间。In one example, the second preset condition includes that the first control is located between the second preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device, and the first preset condition includes that the first control is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen of the electronic device. between a second preset position, wherein the second preset position is located between the first preset position and the edge of the screen.

本申请实施例中电子设备可以通过获取第一控件的坐标值、第一预设位置的坐标值、第二预设位置的坐标值、电子设备屏幕边缘的坐标值，计算第一控件与电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离、第二窗口的宽度、第一控件的位置范围等。具体可参考图9中的相关描述。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device can calculate the first control and the electronic device by acquiring the coordinate value of the first control, the coordinate value of the first preset position, the coordinate value of the second preset position, and the coordinate value of the screen edge of the electronic device. The distance from the edge of the screen, the width of the second window, the position range of the first control, etc. For details, refer to the related description in FIG. 9 .

一个实施例中，方法500还包括：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置。In one embodiment, themethod 500 further includes: detecting a fourth operation of the user; displaying the split screen interface in response to the fourth operation; detecting a fifth operation of the user on the first control, the first The fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is reduced , the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; in response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control meets the third preset condition, the first control The control stays at the position when the user finishes the fifth operation.

本申请实施例中，第四操作与第二操作相同，均用于将悬浮状态的应用窗口切换为分屏状态。本申请实施例中，第五操作可以第一操作、第三操作相同，具体参考上文描述。In the embodiment of the present application, the fourth operation is the same as the second operation, and both are used to switch the application window in the floating state to the split-screen state. In this embodiment of the present application, the fifth operation may be the same as the first operation and the third operation. For details, refer to the above description.

一个示例中，该第三预设条件包括：该第一控件与该电子设备的屏幕边缘的距离大于第五阈值。第五阈值大于或等于上述第一阈值。In one example, the third preset condition includes: the distance between the first control and the edge of the screen of the electronic device is greater than a fifth threshold. The fifth threshold is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned first threshold.

一个示例中，该第三预设条件包括：该第二窗口的宽度大于第六阈值。第六阈值大于或等于上述第三阈值。In an example, the third preset condition includes: the width of the second window is greater than a sixth threshold. The sixth threshold is greater than or equal to the above-mentioned third threshold.

一个示例中，该第三预设条件包括：该第一控件位于第三预设位置与该第一控件的初始位置之间，所述第三预设位置位于所述第一控件的初始位置与所述第一预设位置之间。In one example, the third preset condition includes: the first control is located between a third preset position and the initial position of the first control, and the third preset position is located between the initial position of the first control and the initial position of the first control. between the first preset positions.

本申请实施例中，用户可以通过调整第一控件的位置，来调节第一窗口和第二窗口的分屏比例。In this embodiment of the present application, the user can adjust the split screen ratio of the first window and the second window by adjusting the position of the first control.

一个实施例中，电子设备将该第二窗口以悬浮窗状态显示于该第一窗口之上。In one embodiment, the electronic device displays the second window above the first window in a floating window state.

示例性的，如图6中的(c)、如图9中的(c)所示，电子设备检测到用户停止触摸分隔条303，且分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件，电子设备将第二窗口302以悬浮窗的形式悬浮显示于第一窗口301之上。Exemplarily, as shown in (c) in FIG. 6 and (c) in FIG. 9 , the electronic device detects that the user stops touching theseparation bar 303, and the position of theseparation bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device Thesecond window 302 is suspended and displayed on thefirst window 301 in the form of a floating window.

本申请实施例中，如果用户想要将第二窗口退出分屏状态，用户可以对第一控件进行操作以使第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，这样电子设备将第二窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮窗状态，第二窗口运行的应用以悬浮窗的形式向用户展示应用界面和与用户交互。悬浮窗状态的第二窗口不影响用户使用第一窗口运行的应用，并且当用户想要同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，用户可以随时对悬浮窗进行操作，实现与应用的交互。用户可以不需要重新进行分屏操作，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, if the user wants to exit the split-screen state of the second window, the user can operate the first control so that the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, so that the electronic device splits the second window from the split-screen state. The screen state is switched to the floating window state, and the application running in the second window displays the application interface to the user and interacts with the user in the form of the floating window. The second window in the floating window state does not affect the application run by the user using the first window, and when the user wants to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can operate the floating window at any time to realize interaction with the application. The user does not need to perform the split-screen operation again, which improves the user experience.

可选地，当该第二窗口处于悬浮窗状态时，该第二窗口包括应用界面显示区和工具栏，其中该应用界面显示区用于显示该第二应用的用户界面，该工具栏包括以下控件的至少一种：窗口关闭控件、窗口最小化控件、分屏显示控件、全屏显示控件。Optionally, when the second window is in a floating window state, the second window includes an application interface display area and a toolbar, wherein the application interface display area is used to display the user interface of the second application, and the toolbar includes the following: At least one of the controls: a window closing control, a window minimizing control, a split-screen display control, and a full-screen display control.

示例性，如图10中的(a)所示，该工具栏可以包括以下控件的至少一种：窗口关闭控件321、窗口最小化控件322、分屏显示控件323、全屏显示控件324。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 10 , the toolbar may include at least one of the following controls: windowclose control 321 , window minimizecontrol 322 , split-screen display control 323 , and full-screen display control 324 .

示例性的，当用户点击窗口关闭控件321时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302关闭。这样当用户不需要再同时使用第一窗口301和第二窗口302运行的应用时，用户可以使第二窗口302所运行的应用保持后台运行或者终止应用进程。Exemplarily, when the user clicks thewindow closing control 321, the electronic device may close thesecond window 302 in response to the operation. In this way, when the user does not need to use the applications running in thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 at the same time, the user can keep the application running in thesecond window 302 running in the background or terminate the application process.

示例性的，当用户点击分屏显示控件323时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由悬浮窗状态切换回分屏状态。例如电子设备可以将第二窗口302切换回用户执行退出分屏状态操作前第二窗口所处的分屏状态。这样当用户需要再次同时使用第一窗口301和第二窗口302运行的应用时，用户可以对悬浮窗进行操作，可以快速恢复分屏界面。Exemplarily, when the user clicks the split-screen display control 323, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the floating window state back to the split-screen state. For example, the electronic device may switch thesecond window 302 back to the split-screen state the second window was in before the user performed the operation of exiting the split-screen state. In this way, when the user needs to use the applications running in thefirst window 301 and thesecond window 302 at the same time again, the user can operate the floating window, and can quickly restore the split-screen interface.

示例性的，当用户点击全屏显示控件324时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302由悬浮窗状态切换到全屏状态。这样当用户需要全屏使用第二窗口302运行的应用时，用户可以对悬浮窗进行操作，可以快速切换为全屏界面。Exemplarily, when the user clicks the full-screen display control 324, in response to the operation, the electronic device can switch thesecond window 302 from the floating window state to the full-screen state. In this way, when the user needs to use the application running in thesecond window 302 in full screen, the user can operate the floating window, and can quickly switch to the full screen interface.

示例性的，当用户点击窗口最小化控件322时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302的应用界面显示区310隐藏。第二窗口302仅以工具栏标识应用窗口位置，可以占用更小的显示空间。Exemplarily, when the user clicks thewindow minimization control 322, in response to the operation, the electronic device may hide the applicationinterface display area 310 of thesecond window 302. Thesecond window 302 only uses a toolbar to identify the position of the application window, which can occupy a smaller display space.

示例性的，当用户点击窗口最小化控件322时，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将处于悬浮窗状态的第二窗口302切换为悬浮图标状态。处于悬浮图标状态的第二窗口隐藏了应用的用户界面，可以占用更小的显示空间。Exemplarily, when the user clicks thewindow minimization control 322, in response to the operation, the electronic device may switch thesecond window 302 in the floating window state to the floating icon state. The second window in the floating icon state hides the user interface of the application and can occupy a smaller display space.

一个实施例中，方法500还包括：检测到用户对所述窗口最小化控件的操作，响应于所述操作，隐藏所述应用界面显示区。In one embodiment, themethod 500 further includes: detecting an operation of the window minimization control by the user, and in response to the operation, hiding the application interface display area.

一个实施例中，电子设备将该第二窗口以悬浮图标状态显示于该第一窗口之上。In one embodiment, the electronic device displays the second window on the first window in a floating icon state.

示例性的，如图6中的(d)、如图11中所示，电子设备检测到用户停止触摸分隔条303，且分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件，电子设备将第二窗口302以悬浮图标的形式悬浮显示于第一窗口301之上。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6(d) and FIG. 11 , when the electronic device detects that the user stops touching theseparation bar 303 and the position of theseparation bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device places thesecond window 302 is suspended and displayed on thefirst window 301 in the form of a floating icon.

本申请实施例中，如果用户想要将第二窗口退出分屏状态，用户可以对第一控件进行操作以使第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，这样电子设备将第二窗口由分屏状态切换为悬浮图标状态，第二窗口运行的应用界面隐藏。悬浮图标状态的第二窗口不影响用户使用第一窗口运行的应用，并且当用户想要同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，用户可以随时对悬浮图标进行操作。用户可以不需要重新进行分屏操作，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, if the user wants to exit the split-screen state of the second window, the user can operate the first control so that the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, so that the electronic device splits the second window from the split-screen state. The screen state is switched to the floating icon state, and the application interface running in the second window is hidden. The second window in the state of the floating icon does not affect the application run by the user using the first window, and when the user wants to use the first application and the second application at the same time, the user can operate the floating icon at any time. The user does not need to perform the split-screen operation again, which improves the user experience.

可选地，当该第二窗口处于悬浮图标状态时，还包括：检测到用户对该悬浮图标的操作，响应于该操作，将该第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为悬浮窗状态。Optionally, when the second window is in the floating icon state, the method further includes: detecting a user's operation on the floating icon, and in response to the operation, switching the second window from the floating icon state to the floating window state.

可选地，当该第二窗口处于悬浮图标状态时，还包括：检测到用户对该悬浮图标的操作，响应于该操作，将该第二窗口由悬浮图标状态切换为分屏状态。Optionally, when the second window is in the floating icon state, the method further includes: detecting a user's operation on the floating icon, and in response to the operation, switching the second window from the floating icon state to the split-screen state.

一个实施例中，还包括：检测该第一控件的位置；当该第一控件的位置满足该第一预设条件时，在该分屏界面上显示该第二窗口处于悬浮状态的缩略图。In one embodiment, the method further includes: detecting the position of the first control; when the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, displaying a thumbnail of the second window in a floating state on the split screen interface.

示例性的，如图7中的(a)、(c)所示，当电子设备检测分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备在屏幕上显示第二窗口302切换为悬浮状态例如悬浮窗或悬浮图标的缩略图，以提示用户如果此时松开手指，则将第二窗口302切换为悬浮状态。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) and (c) of FIG. 7 , when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device displays thesecond window 302 on the screen and switches to a suspended state. For example, a thumbnail of a floating window or a floating icon, to prompt the user to switch thesecond window 302 to a floating state if he releases his finger at this time.

上文介绍了方法500应用于二分屏的应用窗口的内容，但应理解，方法500还可以应用于三分屏、四分屏或更多数量分屏的应用窗口，区别在于被拉伸的应用窗口不是全屏显示，而是占用该窗口原来的屏幕区域和被挤压的应用窗口所占的屏幕区域来进行显示。The content of themethod 500 applied to the application window of the two-split screen is described above, but it should be understood that themethod 500 can also be applied to the application window of the three-split screen, the four-split screen or a larger number of split screens, the difference is that the stretched The application window is not displayed in full screen, but occupies the original screen area of the window and the screen area occupied by the squeezed application window for display.

示例性的，如图15中的(a)所示，该分屏界面可以为三分屏的分屏界面，该第一窗口可以为三分屏中占据四分之一屏的第一窗口410，第二窗口可以为三分屏中占据四分之一屏的第二窗口420；或者，该第一窗口可以为三分屏中占据四分之一屏的第一窗口410，第二窗口可以为三分屏中占据二分之一屏的第三窗口430。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 15 , the split-screen interface may be a split-screen interface of a three-split screen, and the first window may be afirst window 410 occupying a quarter of the screen in the three-split screen. , the second window may be thesecond window 420 occupying a quarter of the screen in the three-split screen; or, the first window may be thefirst window 410 occupying a quarter of the screen in the three-split screen, and the second window may It is thethird window 430 occupying one-half of the screen in the three-split screen.

示例性的，如图16中的(a)所示，该分屏界面可以为四分屏的分屏界面，该第一窗口可以为四分屏中占据四分之一屏的第三窗口430，第二窗口可以为四分屏中占据四分之一屏的第四窗口440。Exemplarily, as shown in (a) of FIG. 16 , the split-screen interface may be a split-screen interface of a four-split screen, and the first window may be athird window 430 occupying a quarter of the screen in the four-split screen. , the second window may be thefourth window 440 occupying a quarter of the screen in the quarter screen.

应理解，本申请实施例提供的应用窗口显示方法可以应用于任意分屏个数的电子设备中，可以应用于任意两个相邻的分屏应用窗口。It should be understood that the application window display method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be applied to an electronic device with any number of split screens, and can be applied to any two adjacent split screen application windows.

图18是本申请实施例提供的另一种应用窗口显示方法的示意性流程图，如图18所示，该方法600可以包括如下步骤601至步骤605。FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another application window display method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18 , themethod 600 may include the followingsteps 601 to 605 .

601，显示分屏界面，该分屏界面包括第一窗口、第二窗口和用于分隔该第一窗口和该第二窗口的第一控件，该第一窗口运行第一应用，该第二窗口运行第二应用。601. Display a split screen interface, where the split screen interface includes a first window, a second window, and a first control for separating the first window and the second window, the first window runs a first application, and the second window Run the second application.

602，检测到用户对该第一控件的第一操作，所述第一操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作。602. Detect a first operation of the user on the first control, where the first operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window.

603，响应于该第一操作，将该第一控件向该第二窗口一侧移动，其中，该第二窗口的宽度减小，该第一窗口的宽度增大。603. In response to the first operation, move the first control to a side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window decreases and the width of the first window increases.

604，检测到用户结束所述第一操作。604. It is detected that the user ends the first operation.

605，响应于该第一操作，若该第一控件的位置满足第一预设条件，将该第二窗口以预设宽度锁定于该电子设备的屏幕边缘，其中其中，所述第二窗口处于非激活态，所述第二窗口对应的所述第二应用在后台运行。605. In response to the first operation, if the position of the first control satisfies the first preset condition, lock the second window at the edge of the screen of the electronic device with a preset width, wherein the second window is in the edge of the screen of the electronic device. In an inactive state, the second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background.

方法600中的步骤601-604与方法500中的步骤501-504类似，具体可参考方法500中的相关描述，为简洁，在此不再赘述。下面仅对不同之处进行介绍。Steps 601-604 in themethod 600 are similar to steps 501-504 in themethod 500. For details, please refer to the relevant description in themethod 500. For brevity, details are not repeated here. Only the differences are described below.

在步骤605中，示例性的，如图12中所示，当电子设备检测到分隔条303的位置满足第一预设条件时，电子设备可以将分隔条303设置于预设位置，将第二窗口302以预设宽度锁定(或称固定、吸附、停靠)在屏幕边缘。本申请实施例中应用窗口锁定于屏幕边缘，可以理解为该应用窗口处于非激活状态。第二窗口对应的第二应用在后台运行，在分屏界面上不显示第二应用的用户界面，用户不能通过第二应用的用户界面与电子设备进行交互。处于锁定状态的第二窗口类似于一个功能控件，隐藏了第二应用的用户界面，用户不能与锁定状态的第二窗口交互。在一些实施例中，用户可以对锁定状态的第二窗口执行长按、点击或拖动等操作，响应于上述操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口由非激活态切换为激活态，例如使第二窗口显示第二应用的用户界面等。Instep 605, exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 12, when the electronic device detects that the position of thepartition bar 303 satisfies the first preset condition, the electronic device can set thepartition bar 303 to the preset position, and the second Thewindow 302 is locked (or fixed, snapped, or docked) at the edge of the screen with a preset width. In the embodiment of the present application, the application window is locked at the edge of the screen, which can be understood as the inactive state of the application window. The second application corresponding to the second window runs in the background, the user interface of the second application is not displayed on the split screen interface, and the user cannot interact with the electronic device through the user interface of the second application. The second window in the locked state is similar to a function control, which hides the user interface of the second application, and the user cannot interact with the second window in the locked state. In some embodiments, the user may perform operations such as long pressing, clicking or dragging on the second window in the locked state, and in response to the above operations, the electronic device may switch the second window from an inactive state to an active state, for example, enabling the first window The second window displays the user interface and the like of the second application.

本申请实施例中，当第二窗口处于锁定状态时，第一窗口处于近似全屏状态。In this embodiment of the present application, when the second window is in a locked state, the first window is in an approximately full-screen state.

一个实施例中，方法600还包括：当该第二窗口锁定于该电子设备的屏幕边缘时，还包括：检测到用户对该第二窗口的操作，响应于该操作，将该第二窗口由该预设宽度切换为初始宽度，其中该初始宽度为该第二窗口在该电子设备接收该第一操作前的宽度。In one embodiment, themethod 600 further includes: when the second window is locked on the edge of the screen of the electronic device, further includes: detecting a user's operation on the second window, and in response to the operation, displaying the second window by The preset width is switched to an initial width, wherein the initial width is the width of the second window before the electronic device receives the first operation.

示例性的，如图12中的(c)所示，用户可以执行对锁定窗口的点击操作，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302激活，并将其窗口大小恢复到电子设备接收该第一操作前的宽度，或者恢复为默认尺寸。Exemplarily, as shown in (c) of FIG. 12 , the user may perform a click operation on the locked window, and in response to this operation, the electronic device may activate thesecond window 302 and restore its window size to the value received by the electronic device. The width before the first operation, or restore to the default size.

可选地，方法600还包括：当电子设备检测到用户对第一控件的拖拽操作，所述拖拽操作方向向第一窗口一侧；响应于该操作，电子设备将第二窗口由该预设宽度切换为初始宽度，其中该初始宽度为该第二窗口在该电子设备接收该第一操作前的宽度。Optionally, themethod 600 further includes: when the electronic device detects a user's drag operation on the first control, the direction of the drag operation is to the side of the first window; in response to the operation, the electronic device moves the second window from the The preset width is switched to an initial width, wherein the initial width is the width of the second window before the electronic device receives the first operation.

示例性的，如图12中的(d)所示，用户可以执行对分隔条的反向拖动操作，响应于该操作，电子设备可以将第二窗口302激活，并将其窗口大小恢复到电子设备接收该第一操作前的宽度，或者恢复为默认尺寸。Exemplarily, as shown in (d) of FIG. 12 , the user may perform a reverse drag operation on the divider, and in response to the operation, the electronic device may activate thesecond window 302 and restore its window size to The electronic device receives the width before the first operation, or restores to the default size.

可选地，方法600中第一预设条件的形式与方法500中类似，具体可参考上文描述。Optionally, the form of the first preset condition in themethod 600 is similar to that in themethod 500, for details, please refer to the above description.

一个实施例中，方法600还包括：检测到用户的第二操作；响应于所述第二操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第三操作，所述第三操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第三操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第三操作；响应于结束所述第三操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第二预设条件，将所述第一窗口全屏显示，将所述第二窗口关闭。In one embodiment, themethod 600 further includes: detecting a second operation of the user; displaying the split screen interface in response to the second operation; detecting a third operation of the user on the first control, the first The third operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the third operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is reduced , the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the third operation; in response to ending the third operation, if the position of the first control meets the second preset condition, the first control The window is displayed in full screen, and the second window is closed.

可选地，方法600中第二预设条件的形式与方法500中类似，具体可参考上文描述。Optionally, the form of the second preset condition in themethod 600 is similar to that in themethod 500, and reference may be made to the above description for details.

一个实施例中，方法600还包括：检测到用户的第四操作；响应于所述第四操作，显示所述分屏界面；检测到用户对所述第一控件的第五操作，所述第五操作为向所述第二窗口所在位置的滑动操作；响应于所述第五操作，将所述第一控件向所述第二窗口一侧移动，其中，所述第二窗口的宽度减小，所述第一窗口的宽度增大；检测到用户结束所述第五操作；响应于结束所述第五操作，若所述第一控件的位置满足第三预设条件，将所述第一控件停留在用户结束所述第五操作时的位置。In one embodiment, themethod 600 further includes: detecting a fourth operation of the user; displaying the split screen interface in response to the fourth operation; detecting a fifth operation of the user on the first control, the first The fifth operation is a sliding operation to the position of the second window; in response to the fifth operation, the first control is moved to the side of the second window, wherein the width of the second window is reduced , the width of the first window increases; it is detected that the user ends the fifth operation; in response to ending the fifth operation, if the position of the first control meets the third preset condition, the first control The control stays at the position when the user finishes the fifth operation.

可选地，方法600中第三预设条件的形式与方法500中类似，具体可参考上文描述。Optionally, the form of the third preset condition in themethod 600 is similar to that in themethod 500, and reference may be made to the above description for details.

应理解，方法600可以应用于二分屏的应用窗口，还可以应用于三分屏、四分屏或更多数目分屏的应用窗口，操作过程与方法500类似，不再赘述。It should be understood that themethod 600 can be applied to an application window of a two-split screen, and can also be applied to an application window of a three-split screen, a four-split screen, or more split screens. The operation process is similar to that of themethod 500, and will not be repeated.

本申请实施例中，用户通过调整用于分隔第一窗口和第二窗口的第一控件的位置，可以方便快捷地将应用窗口切换为悬浮状态显示或以预设宽度锁定于屏幕边缘，不影响用户使用其他应用，并且在用户需要再次同时使用第一应用和第二应用时，可以对悬浮状态或锁定状态的应用窗口快速操作，节省用户时间，提升用户体验。In this embodiment of the present application, by adjusting the position of the first control used to separate the first window and the second window, the user can conveniently and quickly switch the application window to display in a floating state or lock it to the edge of the screen with a preset width, without affecting the When the user uses other applications, and when the user needs to use the first application and the second application at the same time again, the user can quickly operate the application window in the suspended state or locked state, which saves the user's time and improves the user experience.

可以理解的是，电子设备为了实现上述功能，其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件和/或软件模块。结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的算法步骤，本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。本领域技术人员可以结合实施例对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the electronic device includes corresponding hardware and/or software modules for executing each function. The present application can be implemented in hardware or in the form of a combination of hardware and computer software in conjunction with the algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functionality for each particular application in conjunction with the embodiments, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.

本实施例可以根据上述方法示例对电子设备进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块可以采用硬件的形式实现。需要说明的是，本实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment, the electronic device can be divided into functional modules according to the above method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware. It should be noted that, the division of modules in this embodiment is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division manners in actual implementation.

在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下，图19示出了上述实施例中涉及的电子设备700的一种可能的组成示意图，如图19所示，该电子设备700可以包括：显示单元701，检测单元701和处理单元703。In the case where each functional module is divided according to each function, FIG. 19 shows a possible schematic diagram of the composition of the electronic device 700 involved in the above embodiment. As shown in FIG. 19 , the electronic device 700 may include: a display unit 701 , a detection unit 701 and a processing unit 703 .

显示单元701可以用于支持电子设备700执行上述步骤501、601等，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。Display unit 701 may be used to support electronic device 700 in performingsteps 501, 601, etc. described above, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.

检测单元702可以用于支持电子设备700执行上述步骤502、504、602、604等，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。Detection unit 702 may be used to support electronic device 700 in performingsteps 502, 504, 602, 604, etc. described above, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.

处理单元703可以用于支持电子设备700执行上述步骤503、505、603、605等，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其他过程。Processing unit 703 may be used to support electronic device 700 in performingsteps 503, 505, 603, 605, etc. described above, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.

需要说明的是，上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述，在此不再赘述。It should be noted that, all relevant contents of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be cited in the functional description of the corresponding functional module, which will not be repeated here.

本实施例提供的电子设备，用于执行上述应用窗口显示方法，因此可以达到与上述实现方法相同的效果。The electronic device provided in this embodiment is used to execute the above application window display method, so the same effect as the above implementation method can be achieved.

在采用集成的单元的情况下，电子设备可以包括处理模块、存储模块和通信模块。其中，处理模块可以用于对电子设备的动作进行控制管理，例如，可以用于支持电子设备执行上述显示单元701，检测单元701和处理单元703。存储模块可以用于支持电子设备执行存储程序代码和数据等。通信模块，可以用于支持电子设备与其他设备的通信。Where an integrated unit is employed, the electronic device may include a processing module, a memory module and a communication module. The processing module may be used to control and manage the actions of the electronic device, for example, may be used to support the electronic device to execute the above-mentioned display unit 701 , detection unit 701 and processing unit 703 . The storage module may be used to support the electronic device to execute stored program codes and data, and the like. The communication module can be used to support the communication between the electronic device and other devices.

其中，处理模块可以是处理器或控制器。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框，模块和电路。处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合，例如包含一个或多个微处理器组合，数字信号处理(digital signal processing，DSP)和微处理器的组合等等。存储模块可以是存储器。通信模块具体可以为射频电路、蓝牙芯片、Wi-Fi芯片等与其他电子设备交互的设备。The processing module may be a processor or a controller. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure. The processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination comprising one or more microprocessors, a combination of digital signal processing (DSP) and a microprocessor, and the like. The storage module may be a memory. The communication module may specifically be a device that interacts with other electronic devices, such as a radio frequency circuit, a Bluetooth chip, and a Wi-Fi chip.

在一个实施例中，当处理模块为处理器，存储模块为存储器时，本实施例所涉及的电子设备可以为具有图1所示结构的设备。In one embodiment, when the processing module is a processor and the storage module is a memory, the electronic device involved in this embodiment may be a device having the structure shown in FIG. 1 .

本实施例还提供一种计算机存储介质，该计算机存储介质中存储有计算机指令，当该计算机指令在电子设备上运行时，使得电子设备执行上述相关方法步骤实现上述实施例中的应用窗口显示方法。This embodiment also provides a computer storage medium, where computer instructions are stored in the computer storage medium, and when the computer instructions are executed on the electronic device, the electronic device executes the above-mentioned relevant method steps to realize the application window display method in the above-mentioned embodiment. .

本实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述相关步骤，以实现上述实施例中的应用窗口显示方法。This embodiment also provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned relevant steps, so as to realize the application window display method in the above-mentioned embodiment.

另外，本申请的实施例还提供一种装置，这个装置具体可以是芯片，组件或模块，该装置可包括相连的处理器和存储器；其中，存储器用于存储计算机执行指令，当装置运行时，处理器可执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令，以使芯片执行上述各方法实施例中的应用窗口显示方法。In addition, the embodiments of the present application also provide an apparatus, which may specifically be a chip, a component or a module, and the apparatus may include a connected processor and a memory; wherein, the memory is used for storing computer execution instructions, and when the apparatus is running, The processor can execute the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory, so that the chip executes the application window display method in the foregoing method embodiments.

其中，本实施例提供的电子设备、计算机存储介质、计算机程序产品或芯片均用于执行上文所提供的对应的方法，因此，其所能达到的有益效果可参考上文所提供的对应的方法中的有益效果，此处不再赘述。Wherein, the electronic device, computer storage medium, computer program product or chip provided in this embodiment are all used to execute the corresponding method provided above. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, reference can be made to the corresponding provided above. The beneficial effects in the method will not be repeated here.

通过以上实施方式的描述，所属领域的技术人员可以了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。From the description of the above embodiments, those skilled in the art can understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example for illustration. In practical applications, the above functions can be allocated to different functions Module completion means dividing the internal structure of the device into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，模块或单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or May be integrated into another device, or some features may be omitted, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.

作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。Units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and components shown as units may be one physical unit or multiple physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed in multiple different places. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.

另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically alone, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.

集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一个设备(可以是单片机，芯片等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated unit, if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a stand-alone product, may be stored in a readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, which are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions to make a device (which may be a single chip microcomputer, a chip, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: a U disk, a removable hard disk, a read only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk and other media that can store program codes.

以上内容，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。The above content is only the specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited to this. Covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.